E84avbde 8400 Baseline D v5-5 en

Inverter
8400 E84AVBDxxxxx...
Inverter Drives 8400 BaseLine D _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Reference manual EN

Ä.>6Iä
13292140
L
Overview of technical documentation for Inverter Drives 8400
________________________________________________________________
Project planning, selection & ordering Legend:

 Hardware manual 8400 BaseLine C/D  Printed documentation
 Catalogue  Online documentation
(PDF/Engineer online help)
Mounting & wiring Abbreviations used:
 MA 8400 BaseLine D BA Operating Instructions
 MA for the accessories KHB Communication manual
MA Mounting instructions
Parameterisation SW Software/reference manual
 SW 8400 BaseLine D  This documentation
Drive commissioning
 SW 8400 BaseLine D  This documentation
 Chapter "Commissioning"
 Chapter "Diagnostics & error management"
 Remote maintenance manual
Networking
 KHB for the communication medium used
 MA for the accessories
2 Lenze · 8400 BaseLine D · Reference manual · DMS 5.5 EN · 01/2014 · TD05

Contents
________________________________________________________________
1 About this documentation _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 8

1.1 Document history _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 8
1.2 Conventions used _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 9
1.3 Terminology used _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 10
1.4 Definition of the notes used _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 12
2 Introduction: Parameterising the controller _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 13

2.1 General notes on parameters _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 14
2.2 Handling the memory module _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 15
2.3 Internal Keypad _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 18
2.3.1 Display elements and control panel _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 18
2.3.2 LED status display _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 19
2.3.3 Display messages _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 20
2.3.4 Menu structure _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 22
2.3.5 User menu _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 23
2.3.6 Quick saving of all parameters at the push of a button _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 24
2.3.7 Password protection _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 24
3 Commissioning _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 26
3.1 Safety instructions with regard to commissioning _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 26
3.2 Preparing the 8400 BaseLine for commissioning _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 27
3.3 Commissioning with integrated keypad _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 28
3.3.1 Load Lenze setting _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 28
3.3.2 Parameterise drive/application _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 29
3.3.3 Save parameter settings safe against mains failure _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 30
3.3.4 Enable controller and select speed _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 31
3.4 Commissioning with the »Engineer« _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 32
3.4.1 Preconditions for commissioning with the »Engineer« _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 32
3.4.2 Creating an »Engineer« project & going online _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 33
3.4.3 Parameterise drive/application _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 34
3.4.4 Save parameter settings safe against mains failure _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 38
3.4.5 Enable controller and select speed _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 38
3.5 PC manual control _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 40
3.5.1 Activating PC manual control _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 40
3.5.2 Speed control _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 43
4 Device control (DCTRL) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 45

4.1 Device commands _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 47
4.1.1 Load Lenze setting _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 49
4.1.2 Loading parameter settings _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 49
4.1.3 Save parameter settings _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 50
4.1.4 Import EPM data _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 50
4.1.5 Enable/Inhibit controller _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 51
4.1.6 Activate/Deactivate quick stop _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 51
4.1.7 Reset error _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 52
4.1.8 Delete logbook _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 52
4.1.9 Identify motor parameters _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 53
4.2 Device states _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 54
4.2.1 Init _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 56
4.2.2 MotorIdent _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 57
4.2.3 SafeTorqueOff _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 57
4.2.4 ReadyToSwitchON _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 58
4.2.5 SwitchedON _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 59
4.2.6 OperationEnabled _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 60
Lenze · 8400 BaseLine D · Reference manual · DMS 5.5 EN · 01/2014 · TD05 3

Contents
________________________________________________________________
4.2.7 Trouble _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 61
4.2.8 Fault _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 62
4.3 "Inhibit at power-on" auto-start option _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 63
5 Motor control (MCTRL) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 65

5.1 Motor selection/Motor data _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 66
5.1.1 Selecting a motor from the motor catalogue in the »Engineer« _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 69
5.1.2 Automatic motor data identification _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 71
5.2 Selecting the control mode _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 74
5.2.1 Selection help _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 76
5.3 Defining current and speed limits _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 77
5.4 V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 79
5.4.1 Parameterisation dialog/signal flow _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 79
5.4.2 Basic settings _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 81
5.4.2.1 Defining the V/f characteristic shape _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 81
5.4.2.2 Defining current limits (Imax controller) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 82
5.4.3 Optimise control behaviour _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 83
5.4.3.1 Adapting the V/f base frequency _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 84
5.4.3.2 Adapting the Vmin boost _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 85
5.4.3.3 Optimising the Imax controller _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 86
5.4.3.4 Torque limitation _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 86
5.4.4 Remedies for undesired drive behaviour _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 87
5.5 Sensorless vector control (SLVC) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 88
5.5.1 Parameterisation dialog _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 89
5.5.2 Speed control with torque limitation _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 89
5.5.3 Basic settings _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 91
5.5.4 Optimise control behaviour _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 91
5.5.4.1 Optimising the starting performance after a controller enable _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 91
5.5.5 Remedies for undesired drive behaviour _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 92
5.6 Parameterisable additional functions _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 93
5.6.1 Selection of switching frequency _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 93
5.6.2 Flying restart function _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 95
5.6.3 DC-injection braking _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 97
5.6.3.1 Manual DC-injection braking (DCB) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 98
5.6.3.2 Automatic DC-injection braking (Auto-DCB) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 98
5.6.4 Slip compensation _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 100
5.6.5 Oscillation damping _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 101
5.7 Braking operation/braking energy management _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 102
5.7.1 Setting the voltage source for braking operation _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 103
5.7.2 Avoiding thermal overload of the brake resistor _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 103
5.8 Monitoring _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 104
5.8.1 Device overload monitoring (Ixt) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 104
5.8.2 Motor load monitoring (I2xt) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 105
5.8.3 Brake resistor monitoring (I2xt) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 107
5.8.4 Mains phase failure monitoring _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 108
6 I/O terminals _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 109

6.1 Digital terminals _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 110
6.2 Analog terminals _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 112
6.2.1 Parameterising analog input _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 113
6.3 User-defined terminal assignment _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 115
6.3.1 Source-destination principle _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 116
6.3.2 Changing the terminal assignment with the »Engineer« _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 117
6.3.3 Changing the terminal assignment via configuration parameters _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 118
6.4 Electrical data _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 120

Contents
________________________________________________________________
7 Drive application _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 122

7.1 Parameterisation dialog _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 123
7.1.1 Signal flow _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 125
7.1.1.1 Selection of the main speed setpoint _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 127
7.1.1.2 Motor potentiometer function _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 127
7.1.1.3 Process controller _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 127
7.2 Interface description _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 128
7.3 Setting parameters (short overview) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 133
7.4 Pre-assignment of the drive application _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 134
7.4.1 Input connections _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 134
7.4.2 Output connections _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 135
7.4.3 Internal signal flow for control via terminals _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 136
7.5 Terminal assignment of the control modes _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 137
7.5.1 Terminals 0 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 138
7.5.2 Terminals 2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 138
7.5.3 Terminals 11 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 139
7.5.4 Terminals 16 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 139
7.5.5 Keypad _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 140
7.5.6 PC _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 141
8 Diagnostics & error management _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 142

8.1 Basics on error handling in the controller _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 142
8.2 Drive diagnostics with the »Engineer« _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 143
8.3 Drive diagnostics via bus system _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 145
8.4 Logbook _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 146
8.4.1 Functional description _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 146
8.4.2 Reading out logbook entries _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 147
8.4.3 Exporting logbook entries to a file _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 147
8.5 Monitoring _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 148
8.5.1 Monitoring configuration _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 149
8.5.2 Setting the error response _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 150
8.6 Maloperation of the drive _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 151
8.7 Error messages of the operating system _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 153
8.7.1 Structure of the error number (bit coding) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 153
8.7.1.1 Error type _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 153
8.7.1.2 Error subject area _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 154
8.7.1.3 Error ID _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 154
8.7.1.4 Example for bit coding of the error number _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 155
8.7.2 Reset of error message _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 155
8.7.3 Short overview (A-Z) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 156
8.7.4 Cause & possible remedies _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 157

Contents
________________________________________________________________
9 Parameter reference _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 164

9.1 Structure of the parameter descriptions _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 165
9.1.1 Data type _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 166
9.1.2 Parameters with read-only access _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 166
9.1.3 Parameters with write access _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 167
9.1.3.1 Parameters with setting range _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 167
9.1.3.2 Parameters with selection list _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 167
9.1.3.3 Parameters with bit-coded setting _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 168
9.1.3.4 Parameters with subcodes _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 169
9.1.4 Parameter attributes _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 170
9.2 Parameter list _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 171
9.2.1 Selection lists for configuration parameters _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 219
9.2.1.1 Selection list - analog signals _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 219
9.2.1.2 Selection list - digital signals _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 220
9.3 Table of attributes _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 221
10 Function library _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 225

10.1 L_MPot_1 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 226
10.1.1 Activate & control motor potentiometer _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 228
10.1.2 Deactivate motor potentiometer _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 229
10.2 L_NSet_1 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 230
10.2.1 Main setpoint path _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 231
10.2.2 JOG setpoints _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 231
10.2.3 Setpoint inversion _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 232
10.2.4 Ramp function generator for the main setpoint _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 232
10.2.5 S-shaped ramp _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 232
10.3 L_PCTRL_1 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 233
10.3.1 Control characteristic _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 236
10.3.2 Ramp function generator _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 237
10.3.3 Operating range of the PID process controller _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 237
10.3.4 Evaluation of the output signal _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 237
10.4 L_RLQ_1 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 238
10.5 LS_AnalogInput _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 240
10.6 LS_DigitalInput _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 241
10.7 LS_DigitalOutput _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 242
10.8 LS_DisFree _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 243
10.9 LS_DisFree_a _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 244
10.10 LS_DisFree_b _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 245
10.11 LS_DriveInterface _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 246
10.12 LS_Keypad _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 249
10.13 LS_ParFix _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 250
10.14 LS_ParFree_a _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 251
10.15 LS_ParFree_b _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 252
10.16 LS_SetError_1 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 253
Index _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 254
Your opinion is important to us _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 259

Contents
________________________________________________________________

1 About this documentation
1.1 Document history
________________________________________________________________
 Danger!
The controller is a source of danger which may lead to death or severe injury of persons.
To protect yourself and others against these dangers, observe the safety instructions be-
fore switching on the controller.
Please read the safety instructions in the mounting instructions and the hardware ma-
nual of the 8400 BaseLine D controller. Both documents are supplied with the controller.
This documentation contains information on the parameterisation of the 8400 BaseLine D control-
ler using the integrated keypad and the L-force »Engineer«.
The information in this documentation is valid for the 8400 BaseLine D controller with the following
nameplate data:
Type Type designation From software version Important

8400 BaseLine D E84AVBDExxxxSX0 2.1 Variant without digital out-
put X4/DO1
8400 BaseLine D E84AVBDExxxxSX1 2.1 Variant with digital output
X4/DO1
Depending on the software version of the controller and the version of the installed »Engineer«
software, the screenshots in this documentation may differ from the representation in the »Engi-
neer«.
 Tip!
Information and tools around the Lenze products can be found in the Download area on
http://www.Lenze.com
1.1 Document history
Version Description
5.5 01/2014 TD05 Error corrections & supplements and converted to new layout
5.4 04/2013 TD05 Error corrections & supplements, parameter reference V03.04.00
5.3 04/2011 TD05 Error corrections & supplements, parameter reference V03.03.00
5.2 09/2010 TD05 Restructuring of some chapters, error corrections & supplements
5.1 11/2009 TD06 Error corrections & supplements

1.2 Conventions used
________________________________________________________________
1.2 Conventions used
This documentation uses the following conventions to distinguish between different types of infor-
mation:
Type of information Writing Examples/notes

Spelling of numbers
Decimal separator Point The decimal point is generally used.
For example: 1234.56
Text
Version info Blue text colour All information that only applies to a certain controller
software version or higher is identified accordingly in this
documentation.
Example: This function extension is available from software
version V3.0!
Program name »« The Lenze »Engineer« PC software ...
Window italics The Message window ... / The Options dialog box...
Variable identifier By setting bEnable to TRUE...
Control element bold The OK button... / The Copy command... / The Properties
tab... / The Name input field...
Sequence of menu If the execution of a function requires several commands,
commands the individual commands are separated by an arrow: Select
FileOpen to...
Shortcut <bold> Press <F1> to open the online help.
If a command requires a combination of keys, a "+" is placed
between the key symbols:
Use <Shift>+<ESC> to...
Hyperlink Underlined Optically highlighted reference to another topic. In this
documentation activated by mouse-click.
DIP switch \ For separating the data of the DIP-Schalterbank from the
("Backslash") switch number, the Backlash" is used.
For instance, S2\8 indicates bank S2 and switch 8 (on the far
right).
Icons
Page reference ( 9) Optically highlighted reference to another page. In this
documentation activated by mouse-click.
Step-by-step instructions Step-by-step instructions are indicated by a pictograph.

Information that is only valid for or as from a certain software version of the controller are marked
accordingly in this documentation.

1.3 Terminology used
________________________________________________________________
Term Meaning
»Engineer« Lenze PC software which supports you in "engineering" (parameterisation, diag-
nostics and configuration) throughout the whole life cycle, i.e. from planning to
maintenance of the commissioned machine.
Application A technology application is a drive solution equipped with Lenze's experience
and know-how in which function and system blocks interconnected to a signal
flow are the basis for implementing typical drive tasks.
ASM Asynchronous motor
CINH Abbreviation: Controller inhibit (pulse inhibit)
Code Parameter used for controller parameterisation or monitoring. The term is usu-
ally called "index".
DC-injection braking DC injection braking is to brake and/or hold the motor. For this purpose, the
8400 BaseLine D creates a quasi DC field at the stator of the asynchronous ma-
chine. The energy to be dissipated is converted into heat in the rotor.
DCTRL Abbreviation: Drive control (device control)
Display code Parameter that displays the current state or value of an input/output of a sys-
tem block.
EPM Memory module on which all parametes of the drive system are saved non-vola-
tilely. These include the parameters of the controller and communication-rele-
vant parameters for the communication unit used.
Function block A function block can be compared with an integrated circuit that contains a cer-
tain control logic and delivers one or several values when being executed.
• Each function block has a unique identifier, e.g. "L_MPot_1" (motor potentio-
meter function)
Holding brake The holding brake serves to hold the rotor by means of a mechanical unit.
LA Abbreviation: Lenze Application block
• Example: "LA_NCtrl" – block for the "actuating drive speed" application.
Lenze setting This setting is the default factory setting of the device.
LP Abbreviation: Lenze Port block
• Example: "LP_Network_In" – port block for fieldbus communication.
LS Abbreviation: Lenze System block
• Example: "LS_DigitalInput" – system block for digital input signals.
MCTRL Abbreviation: Motor control
Port block Block for implementing the process data transfer via a fieldbus
QSP Quick stop ("Quick stop):
The motor control is decoupled from the setpoint selection and within a parame-
terisable deceleration time, the motor is brought to a standstill (nact = 0).
Service brake The service brake serves to shutdown rotary or translatory masses in motion in
a controlled manner. The energy to be dissipated in this process is converted into
heat in the form of friction energy. This process is a regular and recurring opera-
ting mode.
SLVC Motor control: Sensorless vector control ("SensorLess Vector Control")
SM Synchronous motor
Subcode If a code contains several parameters, the individual parameters are stored un-
der "subcodes".
This manual uses a slash "/" as a separator between code and subcode
(e.g. "C118/3").
The term is usually called "subindex".
System block In the application, system blocks provide interfaces to basic functions and to the
hardware of the controller (e.g. to the digital inputs).

________________________________________________________________
Term Meaning
USB diagnostic adapter The USB diagnostic adapter is used for the operation, parameterisation, and di-
agnostics of the controller. Data are exchanged between the PC (USB connec-
tion) and the controller (diagnostic interface on the front) via the diagnostic
adapter.
• Order designation: E94AZCUS
VFCplus Motor control: V/f characteristic control ("Voltage Frequency Control")

1.4 Definition of the notes used
________________________________________________________________
1.4 Definition of the notes used
The following signal words and symbols are used in this documentation to indicate dangers and im-
portant information:
Safety instructions
Layout of the safety instructions:
 Pictograph and signal word!

(characterise the type and severity of danger)
Note
(describes the danger and informs how to prevent dangerous situations)
Pictograph Signal word Meaning

Danger! Danger of personal injury through dangerous electrical voltage
 Reference to an imminent danger that may result in death or serious personal injury
if the corresponding measures are not taken.
Danger! Danger of personal injury through a general source of danger
 Reference to an imminent danger that may result in death or serious personal injury
if the corresponding measures are not taken.
Stop! Danger of property damage
 Reference to a possible danger that may result in property damage if the correspon-
ding measures are not taken.
Application notes
Pictograph Signal word Meaning

Note! Important note to ensure trouble-free operation

Tip! Useful tip for easy handling


2 Introduction: Parameterising the controller
________________________________________________________________
[2-1] Example configuration for parameterising the controller (here: BaseLine D)
Being a component of a machine which includes a speed-variable drive system, the controller needs
to be adjusted to its drive task and the motor. The controller is adjusted by changing parameters
which are saved in the memory module.
 Danger!
In general, changing a parameter causes an immediate response in the controller!
• This may lead to undesirable behaviour on the motor shaft if the controller has been
enabled!
• Setpoint sources, for instance, may switch over all of a sudden (e.g. when configuring
the signal source for the main setpoint).
Certain device commands or settings which may cause critical states of drive behaviour
constitute exceptions. Such parameter changes are only possible if the controller is inhi-
bited. Otherwise, a corresponding error message will be issued.
The parameters can optionally be accessed from the integrated keypad, or the L-force »Engineer«.
• The USB diagnostic adapter, for instance, can be used for the communication between the PC
(including the L-force »Engineer« software) and the controller, see illustration. The USB diag-
nostic adapter is the connection between the PC (free USB port) and the controller (diagnostic
interface).

2.1 General notes on parameters
________________________________________________________________
2.1 General notes on parameters
All parameters for controller parameterising or monitoring are saved as so-called "codes".
• The codes are numbered and designated by a "C" in front of the code, e.g. "C002" in the docu-
mentation and the keypad display.
• In addition, every code has a name and specific attributes:
• Access type (read, write)
• Data type
• Limit values
• Lenze setting (factory-set scaling)
• For the sake of clarity, some codes contain "subcodes" for saving parameters.
• This manual uses a slash "/" as a separator between code and subcode (e.g. "C115/1").
• In the keypad display, the subcodes are designated by a small "c", e.g. "c001".
• According to their functionality, the parameters are divided into three groups:
Parameter group Examples

Setting parameters C007: Selection of control mode
Parameters for specifying setpoints and for setting device / C012: Acceleration time - main setpoint
monitoring functions. C039: Fixed setpoints
Configuration parameters C620: System connection list: 16-bit
Parameters for configuring signal connections within the de- C621: System connection list: Bool
vice, e.g. assignment of the digital input terminals to the C700: LA_NCtrl: Analog connection list
control inputs of the application. C701: LA_NCtrl: Digital connection list
Diagnostic/Display parameters C052: Motor voltage
Parameters for displaying device-internal process factors, C137: Device status
current actual values, and status messages, e.g. for diag- C150: Status word
nostic purposes. These are read-only parameters. C165: Error info
 Tip!
The terms "code" and "subcode" generally correspond to the terms "index" and "subindex"
and "parameter" and "subparameter".

2.2 Handling the memory module
________________________________________________________________
 Danger!
After power-off, wait at least three minutes before working on the controller. When re-
moving the memory module, ensure that the controller is deenergised.
If the memory module has been removed and the device is switched on, the connector
pins are live and thus dangerous since the protection against contact is missing.
All parameters of the drive system are saved non-volatilely in the memory module of the controller.
This includes the parameters of the controller and parameters relevant for communication.
The plug-in version is especially suited for
• restoring an application after replacing a device.
• duplicating identical drive tasks within the 8400 BaseLine frequency inverter series, e.g. by
using the optionally available EPM Programmer.
 Note!
• When the device is switched on, all parameters are automatically loaded from the me-
mory module to the main memory of the controller.
• The 8400 BaseLine and 8400 motec controllers use the same (grey) memory module.
The memory module can be shifted between these controllers but the controller must
be reparameterised afterwards.
• The memory module is not compatible with the memory modules of the
8400 StateLine and 8400 HighLine controllers.
• If the memory module has been removed, the "PS01" error message appears.
When handling the memory module, a distinction is drawn between the following scenarios:
Delivery status
• The memory module is plugged into the EPM slot at the

front of the controller.
• The Lenze setting of the parameters is stored in the memo-
ry module.
• The memory module can be preconfigured with customer-
specific data.
• The memory module is available as a spare part - without
any data.

________________________________________________________________
During operation
 Stop!
The memory module must not be plugged in or unplugged during operation.
• The memory module (EPM) is required for operation.

• Full functionality of the memory module is even provided if the power supply has been switched
off and only the electronic components of the controller are externally supplied by a 24 V DC vol-
tage, e.g. via the X4/24E terminal.
• Parameter settings can be saved manually.
• Parameter settings can be loaded manually.
• Parameter changes can be saved automatically.
Replacing the controller

• In the event of a device replacement, the entire parameter data of an axis can be copied to the
replacement device by "taking along" the memory module, so that additional PC or diagnosis
terminal operations are not required.
• When replacing the controller, the versions of the old device and the new device are of impor-
tance. Before data are actually transferred, the versions are internally checked. Basically, the fol-
lowing applies:
• Parameter sets of old devices with V 1.0 can be processed on new devices ≥ V 1.0
(downward compatibility).
• Parameters of devices with higher versions are not supported on devices with lower versions.
An error message (PS02/PS03) occurs if the parameter set versions of the two devices are not
compatible.
Saving the parameters in the memory module safe against mains failure
Controller parameter changes via the »Engineer«, the integrated keypad, or a master control via
fieldbus communication will be lost after mains switching of the controller unless the settings have
been explicitly saved.
You have various opportunities to prevent a data loss by saving the parameter settings in the me-
mory module:
• Quick saving of all parameters at the push of a button ( 24)
• Automatic saving of parameter changes ( 50)
• Manual saving of parameter settings ( 50)

________________________________________________________________
Parameter set transfer using the »Engineer«

When an online connection to the controller has been established, the following transfer functions
can directly be executed via the Toolbar or the Online menu using the L-force »Engineer«:
Symbol Menu command Shortcut

Download parameter set <F5>
Read parameter set from device <F7>
Save parameter set
 Tip!
Detailed information on parameter set transfers using the »Engineer« can be found in the
»Engineer« online help.

2.3 Internal Keypad
________________________________________________________________
2.3 Internal Keypad
The controller front is provided with an integrated keypad. Use the keypad for quick and simple pa-
rameter setting and for displaying current actual values and device states via the respective display
parameters.
 Note!
After switching on the controller, the internal keypad performs a quick self-test. All seg-
ments of the display flash. After the self-test, the keypad shows "rdy" for a short time
and then changes to the display of the setpoint speed of the motor. The keypad is now
ready for operation.
2.3.1 Display elements and control panel
Important status information of the controller is displayed optically by LEDs. The positions of the co-
loured LEDs are marked on the housing by letters.
C 1
8888
A D
B E
F
ESC
Symbol Information Meaning

 4-character display with LEDs (A ... F)
A orange Set current/torque limit is reached
B yellow Minus sign for identifying the negative numbers bigger than 4 characters
when the rotational direction has been reversed.
C yellow User LED
• configurable via C621/42
• user-defined LED status
D red DRIVE ERROR / DRIVE READY
E green LED status display ( 19)
F yellow Direction of rotation: CCW rotation

Off Direction of rotation: CW rotation
blinking Commanded direction is not equal to actual direction (e.g. during reversing)

2.3 Internal Keypad
________________________________________________________________
Control elements
Key Name Function

ESC Escape key On menu and parameter level: Back
In case of parameter processing: Abort (discard changed setting)
↵ Enter key On menu and parameter level: Next (confirm selection)
In case of parameter processing: OK (accept changed setting)
Long pressing (3 seconds): Saving of all parameters
Quick saving of all parameters at the push of a button ( 24)
 Navigation key On menu and parameter level: Navigation
upwards In case of parameter processing: Set parameter value
 Navigation key Long pressing (> 2 seconds): Quick scroll function
downwards
2.3.2 LED status display
Information on some operating states can quickly be ob-

C tained via the front D and E LEDs:
8888
A D The meaning can be seen from the table below.
B E
F
E D Description Device state

"DRIVE READY" "DRIVE ERROR" (Display in C137)
OFF OFF OFF or initialisation active Init
OFF Safe torque off is active SafeTorqueOff
OFF Device is ready to start ReadyToSwitchON
OFF Device is switched on SwitchedON
OFF Motor data identification/operation OperationEnabled
The controller is ready to switch on, switched

on or the operation is enabled and a warning
is indicated.
OFF Trouble is active Trouble
OFF Fault is active Fault
Legend
The symbols used for indicating the LED states have the following meaning:
LED is flashing once approx. every 3 seconds (slow flash)
LED is flashing once approx. every 1.25 seconds (flash)
LED is flashing twice approx. every 1.25 seconds (double flash)
LED is blinking every second
LED is permanently on

2.3 Internal Keypad
________________________________________________________________
2.3.3 Display messages
Display Meaning
An01 constant Analog input 1: Current < 4 mA
bF blinking Identification error.
• Drive ID stored in EMP does not match the drive ID stored in the
controller.
br flashes during the hold time DC braking is executed.
of DC braking
CAL blinking Identification is executed.
The operation is not yet enabled.
CAL / Err alternatively blinking Identification is not ready to start.
• C088, C089 or C090 is 0.
CAL / Stop alternatively blinking Identification is ready to start.
CL constant Clamp: The current limit value selected in C022 has been reached.
dec constant Deceleration is temporarily suspended because of higher bus volta-
ge
dF01 ... dF10 constant Internal error
dH69 constant Adjustment data error
Err blinking A wrong password has been entered.
FCL constant The current limit value selected in C022 has been exceeded.
FSt constant "Flying restart" function is executed.
ID1 constant Motor data identification error
LU constant DC bus undervoltage
OC1 constant Power section - short circuit
OC12 constant I2xt brake resistor overload
OC2 constant Power section - earth fault
OC5 constant Ixt overload
OC6 constant I2xt motor overload
OC9 constant Ixt overload - shutdown limit
OH constant Heatsink overtemperature
OU constant DC bus overvoltage
PASS 0.5 seconds on Password protection is active
PS01 constant No memory module inserted
PS02 constant Parameter set is invalid
PS03 constant Parameter set device invalid
PS31 constant Incompatible or unknown HW components have been found.
Su02 constant One mains phase is missing
US01 / US02 constant User error 1 / user error 2

2.3 Internal Keypad
________________________________________________________________
 Detailed information on diagnostics using the »Engineer« and a description of possible

error messages can be found in the chapter entitled "Diagnostics & error management".
( 142)

2.3 Internal Keypad
________________________________________________________________
2.3.4 Menu structure
6WDWH 3DVVZRUG 0HQX &RGH 6XEFRGH 9DOXH

ģĤ; (6& (6& (6&
MM %
2#55 ĥ
(6& Ħ % (6& (6&
ĥ

• Without active password protection, the "password" level will be skipped.
• The following applies when changing between the levels "Menu", "Code" and "Subcode":
The keypad records the last selection.
• For codes without subcodes, the "Subcode" level will be skipped.
Menu Info
-0- Access to the parameters of the user menu.
• The user menu of a device serves to create a selection of frequently used parameters to
be able to access and change these parameters quickly. User menu ( 23)
-1- Access to all drive parameters.
-2- Access to parameters for quick commissioning with terminal control.
-3- Access to parameters for quick commissioning with the integrated keypad.
-4- Access to motor control parameters.
-5- Access to diagnostic/display parameters.
 Note!
When the password protection is activated and no password or a wrong password is en-
tered, only the parameters of the user menu can be accessed using the integrated key-
pad. All other menus/parameters require the correct password.
Password protection ( 24)

2.3 Internal Keypad
________________________________________________________________
2.3.5 User menu
The user menu (menu -0-) contains a selection of frequently used parameters to be able to access
and change these parameters quickly.
• The integrated keypad serves to change the preset parameter selection in C517: Enter the codes
the user menu is to contain into the subcodes c001 ...c020. When "0" is set, no entry is displayed
in the user menu.
• The »Engineer« serves to configure the user menu on the User menu tab of the controller. Here,
additional functions are available for loading and saving the parameter selection.
The user menu contains the following parameters:
Code Subcode Info Lenze setting

Value Unit
C051 - Display of actual speed value - rpm

C053 - Display of DC-bus voltage - V
C054 - Display of motor current - A
C061 - Display of heatsink temperature - °C
C137 - Display of device status -
C011 - Reference speed 1500 rpm
C039 c001 Fixed setpoint 1 40.0 %
c002 Fixed setpoint 2 60.0 %
c003 Fixed setpoint 3 80.0 %
C012 - Acceleration time - main setpoint 2.0 s
C013 - Deceleration time - main setpoint 2.0 s
C015 - V/f base frequency 50.0 Hz
C016 - Vmin boost 0.0 %
C022 - Imax in motor mode 47.00 A
C120 - Motor overload threshold (I2xt) 100 %
C087 - Rated motor speed 1460 rpm
C099 - Display of firmware version -
Highlighted in grey = display parameter
 Note!
If the password protection is activated and no password or a wrong password is entered,
only these parameters can be accessed with the integrated keypad.
Password protection ( 24)

2.3 Internal Keypad
________________________________________________________________
2.3.6 Quick saving of all parameters at the push of a button
Keep the entry button pressed for 3 seconds to save all parameter settings safe against mains failu-
re.
• During the saving process, "SAVE" is blinking in the display.

C
• After approximately 2 seconds, "SAVE" will disappear from
8888
SAVE
A D
B E the display and you can continue your work.
F
ESC
3 sec
Related topics:
Save parameter settings ( 50)
2.3.7 Password protection
The controller offers the option to protect the unauthorised access to the menu level by assigning a
password. The following sections describe how to create, change, or delete the password protection
and how to access the menu level via the password.
Enter password and confirm it

Carry out the steps if you want to create the password protection for the first time for e.g. a control-
ler in default status:
Step Info
1. Mains on After the mains has been switched on and the keypad self test has been completed,
"00" is displayed
2. ↵ After pressing the enter key:
Without password protection you have free access from here to all menus (and thus
all parameters).
3.  Select menu -1- (all parameters).
4. ↵ Confirm selection.
5.  Select code C094 ("password").
("00" is now blinking, i.e. entry is possible.)
7.  Set the desired password ("01" ... "9999").
8. ↵ Accept password.
9. ↵ (3 seconds) Keep the entry button pressed for 3 seconds in order to save the parameter settings
safe against mains failure.

2.3 Internal Keypad
________________________________________________________________
Change the existing password or deactivate the password protection
Step Info
"00" is displayed
2. ↵ After pressing the enter key and with existing password protection:
"PASS" is displayed for a short time, then "0000".
3.  Enter password.
4. ↵ Confirm entry.
5.  Select menu -1- (all parameters).
7.  Select code C094 ("password").
(The existing password is now blinking, i.e. a change is possible.)
9.  Change password: Set new password ("01" ... "9999").
Deactivate password protection: Set "00".
10. ↵ Accept setting.
11. ↵ (3 seconds) Keep the entry button pressed for 3 seconds in order to save the parameter settings
safe against mains failure.
Access password-protected controller without knowing the password

When the password protection is activated and no password or a wrong password is entered, only
the max. 20 parameters of the user menu can be accessed.
Step Info
"00" is displayed
3. ↵ After direct confirmation of the value "0000":
or • Only the parameters of the user menu can be selected.
↵ When the wrong password has been entered and confirmed:
• "Err" is displayed for a short time, then only the parameters of the User menu can
be selected.
Reach password-protected menu level with knowing the password
Step Info
"00" is displayed
3.  Enter password.
4. ↵ When the correct password has been confirmed:
You have free access from here to all menus (and thus all parameters).

3 Commissioning
3.1 Safety instructions with regard to commissioning
________________________________________________________________
3 Commissioning
The 8400 BaseLine D controller is commissioned in one of the following ways:
• Commissioning with integrated keypad
• If only a few parameters have to be adapted.
• For test/demonstration purposes.
• Commissioning with PC/»Engineer«
• The »Engineer« provides a comfortable access to all parameters of the 8400 BaseLine D con-
troller and hence full flexibility in the commissioning process.
3.1 Safety instructions with regard to commissioning
General safety instructions

In order to prevent injury to persons or damage to material assets
• before connecting the mains voltage, check
• The wiring for completeness, short circuit, and earth fault
• The "emergency stop" function of the entire system
• The motor circuit configuration (star/delta) must be adapted to the output voltage of the
controller
• The in-phase connection of the motor
• Check the setting of the most important drive parameters before enabling the controller:
• The V/f rated frequency must be adapted to the motor circuit configuration!
• The drive parameters relevant for your application must be set correctly!
• The configuration of the I/O terminals must be adapted to the wiring!
• Make sure that no speed setpoint is applied before controller enable.
Safety instructions with regard to motor operation
 Danger!
• For thermal reasons, continuous operation of self-ventilated motors at a low field fre-
quency and rated motor current is not permissible!
• If required, activate the Brake resistor monitoring (I2xt). ( 107)
• With regard to the V/f base frequency (C015), observe the following difference to the
controllers 8400 StateLine/HighLine/TopLine:
For the 8400 BaseLine, the reference voltage for the V/f base frequency is the rated
motor voltage (C090) according to motor nameplate (independent of the mains vol-
tage on the supply side).

3 Commissioning
3.2 Preparing the 8400 BaseLine for commissioning
________________________________________________________________
3.2 Preparing the 8400 BaseLine for commissioning
 Danger!
Take all the necessary safety precautions before you carry out the following commissio-
ning steps and switch the device on!
Safety instructions with regard to commissioning ( 26)
1. Wiring the power connections

• Refer to the mounting instructions supplied with the drive controller to find help on how to
correctly design the power connections to match the requirements of your device.
2. Wire the control connections
• The following shows the wiring for the Lenze setting.
Analog input at X4 Terminal Function

A1U Setpoint selection
X4 DO1 24E DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1 RFR 12I AR A1U GND
• Scaling: 10 V ≡ 100 % ≡ 1500 rpm
(for 4-pole motor)
1kW
...
10kW 0 ...10V
Digital inputs at X4 Terminal Function

RFR Controller enable: HIGH level
X4 DO1 24E DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1 RFR 12I AR A1U GND
Error reset: HIGH-LOW edge
DI1 Selection fixed setpoint 1 ... 3
DI2
DI3 Request DC-injection braking (DCB)
DI1 ... DI4: All HIGH active
DI4 Request change of direction of rotation
3. Inhibit the controller:

Set terminal X4/RFR to LOW level or open contact to terminal X4/12I .
4. Switch on voltage supply of the controller.
• Information on some operating states can be quickly obtained via the LED display of the in-
tegrated keypad. LED status display ( 19)
When the green LED is blinking and the red LED is off, the controller is ready to start and you can
continue with commissioning as required:
Commissioning with integrated keypad ( 28)
or
Commissioning with the »Engineer« ( 32)

3 Commissioning
3.3 Commissioning with integrated keypad
________________________________________________________________
Only a few parameters need to be adapted for the drive. Afterwards, the drive application can be im-
mediately controlled via the digital and analog inputs of the controller in the preset control mode
"Terminals 0".
 Information on how to use the integrated keypad can be found in the chapter entitled
"Internal Keypad". ( 18)
Commissioning steps
In the following, commissioning of the controller using the integrated keypad is described step by
step. Please process the chapters consecutively and execute all steps carefully. This procedure will
help you to commission the controller quickly and as safe as possible:
Load Lenze setting
Parameterise drive/application ( 29)
Save parameter settings safe against mains failure ( 30)
Enable controller and select speed ( 31)
3.3.1 Load Lenze setting
In order to achieve a defined device configuration, it is advisable to make sure that the device is in
its original delivery state. For this purpose, the "Load Lenze setting" device command is available.
Step Info
"00" is displayed
2. ↵ After pressing the enter key:
Without password protection you have free access from here to all menus (and thus
all parameters).
3.  Select menu -2-.
• The menu -2- contains parameters for quick commissioning with terminal cont-
rol.
5. ↵ Confirm first code C002 ("device commands") of the menu -2-.
6. ↵ Confirm subcode c001 ("load Lenze setting").
7.  Set value "01" (≡ "Start").
8. ↵ Accept parameter setting to execute the "Load Lenze setting" device command.

3 Commissioning
________________________________________________________________
3.3.2 Parameterise drive/application
The menu -2- of the integrated keypad contains all basic parameters to commission the drive/appli-
cation "actuating drive speed" quickly and easily for a terminal control. When you set these parame-
ters to suitable and sensible values, the controller can be operated properly.
Parameter Lenze setting Info

Value Unit
C002/1 0: Off / ready Reset all parameters to the Lenze setting which are sa-
Load Lenze setting ved in the controller firmware.
C007 10: Terminals 0 Terminal assignment of the control modes ( 137)
Select control mode
C011 1500 rpm All speed setpoint selections are provided in % and al-
Reference speed ways refer to the reference speed set in C011.
The motor reference speed is given on the motor name-
plate.
C012 2.0 s The setpoint is led via a ramp function generator with li-
Acceleration time - main setpoint near characteristic. The ramp function generator con-
verts setpoint step-changes at the input into a ramp.
C013 2.0 s
L_NSet_1 ( 230)
Deceleration time - main setpoint
C015 50.0 Hz Adapting the V/f base frequency ( 84)
V/f base frequency
C016 0.0 % Adapting the Vmin boost ( 85)
Vmin boost
C022 47.00 A Optimising the Imax controller ( 86)
Current limit (in motor mode)
C087 1460 rpm Motor selection/Motor data ( 66)
Rated motor speed
C089 50 Hz
Rated motor frequency
C039/1 40.0 % A fixed setpoint for the setpoint generator can be acti-
Fixed setpoint 1 vated instead of the main setpoint via the digital inputs
DI1 and DI2.
C039/2 60.0 %
• The fixed setpoints are selected in [%] based on the
Fixed setpoint 2 reference speed (C011).
C039/3 80.0 % L_NSet_1 ( 230)
Fixed setpoint 3
C051 - rpm
Actual speed value
C054 - A
Current motor current
More detailed information on the drive application:

Drive application ( 122)
Interface description ( 128)
Setting parameters (short overview) ( 133)
Pre-assignment of the drive application ( 134)
Terminal assignment of the control modes ( 137)

3 Commissioning
________________________________________________________________
3.3.3 Save parameter settings safe against mains failure
If parameter settings are changed in the controller, those changes will be lost after mains switching
of the controller unless the settings have been saved explicitly.
• Keep the entry button pressed for 3 seconds in order to save

C
the parameter settings safe against mains failure.
8888
SAVE
A D
B E
F  Tip!
In C141, an automatic saving can be activated.
ESC
Automatic saving of parameter changes ( 50)
3 sec

3 Commissioning
________________________________________________________________
3.3.4 Enable controller and select speed
 Note!
If the controller is enabled at power-on and the auto-start option is activated in C142 "In-
hibit at power-on" (Lenze setting), the controller remains in the "ReadyToSwitchON" sta-
te.
For changing to the "SwitchedON" state, first deactivate the controller enable: Set termi-
nal X4/RFR to LOW level or open contact to terminal X4/12I.
When the controller is in the "SwitchedON" state:

1. Enable controller:
Set terminal X4/RFR to HIGH level or close contact to terminal X4/12I n.
2. Select speed:
• In the "Terminals 0" by selecting a voltage at the analog input or by selecting a fixed setpoint
via the digital inputs DI1/DI2.
DI1 DI2 Speed selection

LOW LOW The setpoint speed is selected via the analog input 1
• Scaling: 10 V ≡ 100 % ≡ reference speed (C011)
HIGH LOW The fixed setpoint 1 (C039/1) is used as setpoint speed.
• Lenze setting: 40 % of the reference speed (C011)
LOW HIGH The fixed setpoint 2 (C039/2) is used as setpoint speed.
HIGH HIGH The fixed setpoint 3 (C039/3) is used as setpoint speed.
 Note!
Observe the actual speed value (display in C051) as well as the LED status display and
Display messages indicated in the integrated keypad.
 Tip!
More control functions in the "Terminals 0" control mode:
• DI3: HIGH level ≡ request DC-injection braking
• DI4: HIGH level ≡ request change of direction of rotation

3 Commissioning
3.4 Commissioning with the »Engineer«
________________________________________________________________
Commissioning with the »Engineer« is suited for every drive task and in particular for drive tasks
with more demanding requirements/more comprehensive parameter setting.
In the following, commissioning of the controller is described step by step. Please process the chap-
ters consecutively and execute all steps carefully. This procedure will help you to commission the
controller quickly and as safe as possible:
Preconditions for commissioning with the »Engineer«
Creating an »Engineer« project & going online
Parameterise drive/application
Save parameter settings safe against mains failure
Enable controller and select speed
3.4.1 Preconditions for commissioning with the »Engineer«
For commissioning, you need

• a PC that satisfies the following requirements:
• processor with 1.4 GHz or higher
• at least 512 MB RAM and 650 MB free hard disc space
• Microsoft® Windows® 2000 operating system (from service pack 2 onwards) or
Windows® XP
• the Lenze »Engineer« PC software
• a connection to the controller, e.g. via USB diagnostic adapter:
• Connect the USB diagnostic adapter to the diagnostic interface X6.
• Connect the USB diagnostic adapter to the PC via a free USB port.
 Tip!
How to obtain/update the L-force »Engineer« software:
• Download from the Internet:
The full version of the »Engineer StateLevel« is provided free of charge. Current software
can be found on the Internet in the "Services & Downloads" area under http://
www.Lenze.com.
• Requesting the CD
You can also request the L-force »Engineer« separately on CD free of charge at your Lenze
representative. See the "About Lenze" area on our homepage for e.g. the corresponding
German address.

3 Commissioning
________________________________________________________________
3.4.2 Creating an »Engineer« project & going online
 You can find detailed information on the general use of the »Engineer« in the online help
which you can call with [F1].
• In the "Working with projects" chapter, all options of the start-up wizard are described
to create a new »Engineer« project.
The following steps describe the standard procedure of creating a project using the Select
component from catalogue option. Here, you select the single components (controller, motor, etc.)
from selection lists.
1. Start the »Engineer«.
2. Create a new project by means of the Start-up wizard and the Select component from catalogue
option:
• In the Component dialog step, select the 8400 BaseLine D controller.
• Select the other components (motor/gearbox) to be added to the project in the Other
components dialog step.
3. Go online.
• After a successful connection to the controller, the following status is displayed in the Status
line:
4. Download parameter set.

• This command serves to overwrite the current parameter settings in the controller by para-
meter settings of the »Engineer« project.

3 Commissioning
________________________________________________________________
3.4.3 Parameterise drive/application
Go to Workspace and change to the Application parameters tab.
Parameterising the motor control

On the left, the parameters of the motor control are arranged:
1. Go to the Motor control (C006) list field and select the required motor control.
 Note!
In the Lenze setting, the V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) with linear characteristic is
set in C006 as motor control.
• The V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) is an motor control for standard frequency in-
verter applications based on a simple and robust control process which is suitable for
the operation of machines with linear or square-law load torque characteristic (e.g.
fans).
• The parameter settings have been set in advance in such a way that, if the drive con-
troller and 50 Hz asynchronous machine match each other in terms of performance,
the drive controller is immediately ready for operation without any further parameter
setting work and the motor works satisfactorily.

3 Commissioning
________________________________________________________________
2. Adapting the parameters of the motor control:

Value Unit
V/f base frequency 50.0 Hz Adapting the V/f base frequency ( 84)
(C015)
Imax in motor mode 47.00 A Optimising the Imax controller ( 86)
(C022)
Vmin boost 0.0 % Adapting the Vmin boost ( 85)
(C016)
 Tip!
Also check the other information on the nameplate against the motor data set in the drive
controller. You can find further information in the chapter entitled "Motor selection/Motor
data". ( 66)
Recommendations for the following application cases:
• If the controller and motor differ greatly from each other in terms of performance:Set
the Imax limit (in motor mode) in C022 to double the rated motor current.
• If a higher starting torque is required:
In idle state of the motor, set the Vmin boost in C016 in such a way that the rated motor
current flows at a field frequency of f = 3 Hz (display in C058).
• If a high torque is to be available at low speed and without a feedback:Select the "sen-
sorless vector control" (SLVC) in C006 as motor control.

3 Commissioning
________________________________________________________________
Parameterise application
On the right of the Application parameters tab, the parameters of the application are arranged:
1. Select the required control mode in the Control mode (C007) list field.
• The corresponding wiring diagram is displayed in a pop-up window if you click the button
right to the list field.
• For a detailed description, see chapter entitled "Terminal assignment of the control modes".
( 137)
2. Optional: Use process controller.

• For this purpose select the required operating mode in the L_PCTRL_1: Operating mode
(C242) list field.
• For a detailed description see the function block L_PCTRL_1. ( 233)
• The parameterisation dialog of the process controller can be accessed via the Process
controller button.
3. Optional: Use motor potentiometer.
• For this purpose, select "1: On" in the L_MPot_1: Use (C806) list field.
• For a detailed description see the function block L_MPot_1. ( 226)
• The parameterisation dialog of the process controller can be accessed via the Motor
potentiometer button.

3 Commissioning
________________________________________________________________
4. Adapt parameters of the application:

Value Unit
Accel. time - main setpoint 2.0 s The setpoint is led via a ramp function generator with li-
(C012) near characteristic. The ramp function generator con-
verts setpoint step-changes at the input into a ramp.
Decel. time - main setpoint 2.0 s
L_NSet_1 ( 230)
(C013)
Reference speed 1500 rpm All speed setpoint selections are provided in % and al-
(C011) ways refer to the reference speed set in C011.
plate.
Deceleration time - quick 5.0 s When "quick stop" is requested, the motor control is de-
stop coupled from the setpoint selection and within the de-
(C105) celeration time parameterised in C105, the motor is
brought to a standstill in (nact = 0).
Activate/Deactivate quick stop ( 51)
Fixed setpoint 1 40.0 % A fixed setpoint for the setpoint generator can be acti-
(C039/1) vated instead of the main setpoint via the digital inputs
DI1 and DI2.
Fixed setpoint 2 60.0 %
• The fixed setpoints are selected in [%] based on the
(C039/2) reference speed (C011).
Fixed setpoint 3 80.0 % L_NSet_1 ( 230)
(C039/3)
 Tip!
• Via the Signal flow button, you get one dialog level lower to the signal flow of the appli-
cation with further parameterisation opportunities. See chapter entitled
"Parameterisation dialog". ( 123)
• The preconfigured I/O connection in the selected control mode can be changed via con-
figuration parameters. See chapter entitled "User-defined terminal assignment". ( 115)
More detailed information on the drive application:

Drive application ( 122)
Interface description ( 128)
Setting parameters (short overview) ( 133)

3 Commissioning
________________________________________________________________
3.4.4 Save parameter settings safe against mains failure
In order that parameter settings made in the device do not get lost by means of mains switching,
you must safe the parameter set explicitly safe against mains failure in the device.
• Save parameter set
3.4.5 Enable controller and select speed
 Note!
If the controller is enabled at power-on and the auto-start option is activated in C142
(Lenze setting), the controller remains in the "ReadyToSwitchON" state (display in C137).
For changing to the "SwitchedON" state, first deactivate the controller enable: Set termi-
nal X4/RFR to LOW level or open contact to terminal X4/12I.
When the controller is in the "SwitchedON" state:

1. Enable controller:
Set terminal X4/RFR to HIGH level or close contact to terminal X4/12I n.
2. Select speed:
• In the "Terminals 0" by selecting a voltage at the analog input or by selecting a fixed setpoint
via the digital inputs DI1/DI2.
DI1 DI2 Speed selection

LOW LOW The setpoint speed is selected via the analog input 1
• Scaling: 10 V ≡ 100 % ≡ reference speed (C011)
HIGH LOW The fixed setpoint 1 (C039/1) is used as setpoint speed.
LOW HIGH The fixed setpoint 2 (C039/2) is used as setpoint speed.
HIGH HIGH The fixed setpoint 3 (C039/3) is used as setpoint speed.
 Note!
Observe the actual speed value (display in C051) as well as the LED status display and
Display messages indicated in the keypad.
 Tip!
More control functions in the "Terminals 0" control mode:
• DI3: HIGH level ≡ request DC-injection braking
• DI4: HIGH level ≡ request change of direction of rotation

3 Commissioning
________________________________________________________________
Diagnostics options
When the »Engineer« is used, trouble during commissioning can be detected and eliminated conve-
niently. Proceed as follows:
• Check whether error messages appear in the »Engineer«.
• You can find a description of each possible message in the chapter entitled "Diagnostics &
error management". ( 142)
• Check the input terminals for their corresponding setpoints.
• The Terminal assignment tab displays the current input/output signals.
• Check the signal flow of the application.
• To do this, open the Application Parameters tab and click on the Signal flow button. The sig-
nal flow which is then shown enables a view of the setpoints being applied and their proces-
sing.

3 Commissioning
3.5 PC manual control
________________________________________________________________
This function extension is available as of version 03.03.00 and is supported by the »Engineer« as of
version 2.14!
For test and demonstration purposes, PC manual control can be used to manually control various
drive functions via the »Engineer« when an online connection has been established.
Supported drive functions:

• Speed control (follow a speed setpoint)
• Activate/Deactivate quick stop
More control functions:

• Reset of error message
• Set digital/analog outputs (in preparation)
Diagnostic functions:
• Display of the actual speed value and motor current (in a temporal characteristic)
• Display of the current device state
• Display of the status determining error
• Display of the status of the digital/analog inputs (in preparation)
3.5.1 Activating PC manual control
 Stop!
PC manual control must be explicitly activated by the user.
If PC manual control is activated, the controller is inhibited via device command (C002/
16) first.
 Note!
For activated PC manual control:
The online connection between the PC and the controller is monitored by the controller.
• If the online connection is interrupted for longer than 2 s, error response "Fault" is trig-
gered, i.e. the motor becomes torqueless and is coasting unless it already is at stand-
still.
PC manual control transmits all required control and setpoint signals to the motor inter-
face.
• The application is now decoupled from these interfaces, but will be processed as be-
fore and remains unchanged.
• It does not matter what type of motor control is set in C006.

3 Commissioning
________________________________________________________________
 How to activate PC manual control:

1. If an online connection to the controller has not been established yet:
Go online.
2. Go to Workspace and change to the Application parameters tab.
3. Go to the Overview dialog level and click the PC manual control button.
• The following safety note is displayed first:
• Click the Cancel button to abort the action and close the dialog box.
4. To acknowledge the note and activate PC manual control:
Click the Connect PC manual control button.
• The controller is inhibited via device command (C002/16).
• The PC manual control operator dialog is displayed.

3 Commissioning
________________________________________________________________
PC manual control operator dialog

On the left-hand side, the PC manual control operator dialog includes control elements which serve
to select various control functions. On the right-hand side, setpoint and status displays are provided
for diagnostic purposes:
 Note!
PC manual control can be exited any time by clicking the Close button.
If you exit PC manual control or change to another tab, the controller is inhibited via de-
vice command (C002/16), i.e. the motor becomes torqueless and is coasting unless it al-
ready is at standstill.
The execution of the various functions is described in the following chapters.

3 Commissioning
________________________________________________________________
3.5.2 Speed control
Via the Speed control tab, simply make the drive rotate in the "Speed follower" operating mode wi-
thout the need to set control parameters or feedback systems:
 How to make the motor rotate in its most basic way:

1. Set the desired speed setpoint in [%] based on the reference speed, e.g. directly in the
Setpoint PC input field or via the slider.
• Via the -- / 0 / ++ buttons, the currently set speed setpoint can be reduced/increased in
steps of 10 percent or set to zero.
• Via the Set setpoint A/B buttons, the speed setpoint can be set to a previously set con-
stant value A/B.
2. To start the speed follower:
Enable the controller via the Enable controller button.
• Please observe that the controller will not be enabled if other sources of controller inhi-
bit (e.g. terminal RFR) are active.
• The enabled controller is now following the selected speed setpoint.
• To avoid shocks or overload in case of great setpoint changes, the speed setpoint follows
a linear ramp generator with adjustable acceleration/deceleration time.
• Via the Inhibit controller button, the controller can be inhibited again, i.e. the motor be-
comes torqueless and is coasting unless it already is at standstill.

3 Commissioning
________________________________________________________________
Further functions:
• If the Set quick stop (QSP) button is clicked, the motor is braked to a standstill within the dece-
leration time parameterised in C105.
• Via the Deactivate quick stop (QSP) button, the quick stop can be deactivated.
• Via the << Left and Right >> buttons, the direction of rotation can be changed.

4 Device control (DCTRL)
________________________________________________________________

This chapter provides information on the internal device control as well as the device commands
which can be executed via the subcodes of C002.
• The device control causes the controller to take defined device states.
• The device control provides a multitude of status information in many ways:
• Optically via the LED status display of the integrated keypad. ( 19)
• As text messages in Logbook. ( 146)
• As process signals via the outputs of the LS_DriveInterface system block. ( 246)
• Via diagnostic / display parameters which are included in the »Engineer« parameter list as
well as in the Diagnostics category in the keypad.
 Note!
The device states of the controller are based on the operating states of the CiA402 stan-
dard. Device states ( 54)

________________________________________________________________
 How to get to the parameterisation dialog of the device control:

1. »Engineer« Go to the Project view and select the 8400 BaseLine D controller.
3. Go to the Overview dialog level and click the Drive interface button.
Parameterisation dialog in the »Engineer«

The parameterisation dialog shows the input / output signals and the internal signal flow of the
LS_DriveInterface system block which displays the device control in the application:
Range / Meaning Display parameter

 Display of the internal state machine and the current device state C137
 Display of all active sources of a controller inhibit C158
 Display of all active sources of a quick stop C159
 Display of the status word of the device control C150

4.1 Device commands
________________________________________________________________
4.1 Device commands
The following subchapters describe the device commands which are provided in the subcodes of
C002 and can be carried out using the keypad or, alternatively, the »Engineer« when an online con-
nection has been established.
The device commands serve to directly control the controller, to organise parameter sets, and to call
diagnostic services.
Regarding the execution of the device commands, a distinction is drawn between:
• Device commands which have an immediate effect on control (e.g. "Activate quick stop")
• After being called in C002/x, these device commands provide static status information ("On"
or "Off").
• Device commands with longer execution durations (several seconds)
• After being called in C002/x, these device commands provide the status information "Work
in progress".
• The execution of the device command has not finished successfully until the "Off / ready" sta-
tus information is provided in C002/x.
• In the event of an error, the "Action cancelled" status information is provided in C002/x . In
this case, further details can be obtained from the status of the device command executed
last which is displayed in C003.
 Note!
• Before activating the device commands through a master control, please wait for the
"ready" message of the controller.
• The device will reject a write process to C002/x if the value is >1 and issue an error
message.
• In C003 displays the status of the device command executed last.
 Detailed information on the various device commands can be found in the following
subchapters.
• Before you follow the instructions given therein, ensure that you have selected the
controller in the Project view.

4.1 Device commands
________________________________________________________________
Device commands - short overview
C00002 Device command Controller inhibit re- Status information

Subcode: quired
1 Load Lenze setting  dynamic
2 Loading parameter settings  dynamic
7 Save parameter settings dynamic
12 Import EPM data static
16 Enable/Inhibit controller static
17 Activate/Deactivate quick stop static
19 Reset error static
21 Delete logbook static
23 Identify motor parameters  dynamic
* Subcodes which are not listed are reserved for future extensions.
Activate device command

When an online connection has been established, you can simply use the »Engineer« to activate a
device command by selecting the corresponding option from the Parameter tab in C002/x ("0: Off"
or "1: On / start").
• Alternatively, the device command can also be activated via keypad by writing to C002/x.
• Some of the frequently used device commands (such as "Save parameter settings") can also be
executed via toolbar icons of the »Engineer« when an online connection has been established:
Symbol Function
Enable controller
Inhibit controller
Save parameter settings
 Note!
Device commands that can be executed via the toolbar of the »Engineers« always affect
the element currently selected in the Project view including all subelements!
• If no controller, but e.g. a system module is selected in the Project view, the correspon-
ding device command will be activated in all lower-level controllers having an online
connection with the »Engineer«.
Before the desired action is carried out, a confirmation prompt appears first, asking whe-
ther the action is really to be carried out.

4.1 Device commands
________________________________________________________________
4.1.1 Load Lenze setting
The C002/1 = "1: On / start" device command resets the parameters to the Lenze setting which are
saved in the controller firmware.
• Can only be executed if the controller is inhibited; otherwise, the feedback C002/1 = "6: No ac-
cess - controller inhibit" will be returned".
• All parameter changes which have been carried out after the last time the parameter settings
were saved will be lost!
• This device command has an effect on the settings of the parameters of the operating system,
application and module.
 How to load the Lenze setting:

1. If the controller is enabled, it must be inhibited, e.g. by executing the "Enable/Inhibit cont-
roller" device command" (C002/16 = "0: Off / ready").
2. Execute the "Load Lenze setting" device command C002/1 = "1: On / start"
The load process may take a couple of seconds. After the device command has been called
in C002/1 a dynamic status information ("Work in progress" W "Off / ready") is returned.
4.1.2 Loading parameter settings
The C002/2 = "1: On / start" device command reloads all parameters from the memory module to
the controller.
• Can only be executed if the controller is inhibited; otherwise, the feedback C002/2 = "6: No ac-
cess - controller inhibit" will be returned.
• All parameter changes which have been carried out after the last time the parameter settings
were saved will be lost!
• This device command has an effect on the settings of the parameters of the operating system,
application and module.
 Note!
When the device is switched on, all parameters are automatically loaded from the me-
mory module to the main memory of the controller.
 How to reload the starting parameter settings from the memory module:
1. If the controller is enabled, it must be inhibited, e.g. by executing the "Enable/Inhibit cont-
roller" device command (C002/16 = "0: Off / ready").
2. Execute the "Load Lenze setting" device command:C002/2 = "1: On / start"
The load process may take a couple of seconds. After the device command has been called
in C002/2 a dynamic status information ("Work in progress" W "Off / ready") is returned.

4.1 Device commands
________________________________________________________________
4.1.3 Save parameter settings
If parameter settings are changed in the controller, those changes will be lost after mains switching
of the controller unless the settings have been saved explicitly.
You have various opportunities to prevent a data loss by saving the parameter settings in the me-
mory module:
• Quick saving of all parameters at the push of a button ( 24)
• Automatic saving of parameter changes
• Manual saving of parameter settings
 Note!
How to prevent a data loss:
• Do not switch off the supply voltage during the saving process.
• Only unplug the memory module if the device is switched off.
Automatic saving of parameter changes
 Stop!
Activating this function is not permissible if parameters are changed very frequently
(e.g. in case of cyclic writing of parameters via a bus system).
The maximum service life of the memory module amounts to one million writing cycles.
Make sure that this value will not be reached.
When you set the selection "1: Active" in C141/1, the automatic saving function is activated and
every parameter change is automatically saved in the memory module.
Manual saving of parameter settings

The C002/7 = "1: On / start" device command saves the current parameter settings safe against
mains failure to the memory module of the controller.
4.1.4 Import EPM data
The C002/12 = "1: device command activates the automatic import of parameters from the memo-
ry module after the error message "PS04: Par.set incompatible".

4.1 Device commands
________________________________________________________________
4.1.5 Enable/Inhibit controller
The C002/16 = "1: : On / start" device command enables the controller, provided that no other sour-
ce of a controller inhibit is active.
The C002/16 = "0: Off / ready" device command serves to inhibit the controller, i.e. the power out-
put stages in the controller are inhibited and the speed/current controller of the motor control is re-
set.zurückgesetzt.
• The motor becomes torqueless and coasts down.
• When the controller is inhibited, the status output bCInhActive of the LS_DriveInterface system
block is set to TRUE.
• When the controller inhibit request is reset, the drive synchronises to the actual speed. For this
purpose,
• If the flying restart circuit is activated in C990, the flying restart function parameterised in
C991 is used for the synchronisation to the rotary or standing drive. Flying restart function
( 95)
 Tip!
• The controller can also be enabled or inhibited via the and toolbar icons.
• C158 provides a bit coded representation of all active sources/triggers of a controller in-
hibit.
4.1.6 Activate/Deactivate quick stop
The C002/17 = ""1: On / start" device command activates the quick stop function, i.e. the motor con-
trol is separated from the setpoint selection, and within the deceleration time parameterised in
C105 the motor is brought to a standstill (nact = 0).
Parameter Info Lenze setting

Value Unit
C105 Deceleration time - quick stop 2.000 s

• A pulse inhibit (CINH) is set if the "Auto-DCB" function has been activated via C019.
The C002/17 = "0: Off / ready" device command deactivates the quick stop again, provided that no
other source of a quick stop is active.
 Tip!
C159 provides a bit coded representation of all active sources/triggers of a quick stop.

4.1 Device commands
________________________________________________________________
4.1.7 Reset error
The C002/19 = "1: On / start" device command acknowledges an existing error message if the error
cause has been eliminated and thus the error is not pending anymore.
• After resetting the current error, further errors may be pending which must be reset as well.
• The last 8 errors are displayed in C168.
 Tip!
An error message can also be acknowledged by activating the Reset error button in the
Diagnostics tab.
In the Lenze setting, switching RFR also causes an error acknowledgement (see configura-
tion parameter C701/2).
Detailed information on error messages can be found in the chapter entitled "Diagnostics
& error management". ( 142)
4.1.8 Delete logbook
The C002/21 = "1: On / start" device command deletes all logbook entries.
 Tip!
Click the Logbook button in the Diagnostics tab to display the logbook in the »Engineer«.
In the Logbook dialog box, it is also possible to delete all logbook entries by clicking the
Delete button.
Detailed information on the logbook can be found in the chapter entitled "Diagnostics &
error management". ( 142)

4.1 Device commands
________________________________________________________________
4.1.9 Identify motor parameters
The C002/23 = "1: On / start" device command performs automatic identification of the motor pa-
rameters.
• The device command is only executed when the drive controller is in the "SwitchedON" state.
• In order to identify the motor parameters, the controller must be enabled after this device com-
mand.
• After that it changes to the "MotorIdent" device state.
• After the execution of the identification, it changes back to the "SwitchedON" device state.
 Tip!
Detailed information on automatic identification of motor parameters can be found in the
"Automatic motor data identification" subchapter on motor control (MCTRL). ( 71)

4.2 Device states
________________________________________________________________
4.2 Device states
The state machine causes the controller to take defined states:
Device state machine
Power on
Init
1
0 0
SafeTorqueOff Fault
10 8
ReadyTo
MotorIdent
SwitchOn
2
3
Operation
SwitchedOn
Enabled
4
5
1
Trouble Warning
7
Grey field: pulse inhibit
 Can be reached from all states.

 "Warning" contradicts the definition of a device state. In fact, it is a message which is to call attention to the
device state the warning exists for.
"Warning" can occur in parallel to other states.
• The arrows between the device states mark the points where the possible device states begin
and end.
• The digits stand for the state ID (see table below).

4.2 Device states
________________________________________________________________
• The change from one state to another is done in a 1 ms cycle. If, at the same time, several state
change requests exist, the state with the higher priority is processed first (see the following ta-
ble).
• In C137 displays the current device state.
• In C150 (status word) provides a bit coded representation of the current device state via bits
8 ... 11 (see table below).
ID Device state Priority Status bits Meaning

(Display in C137) (Display in C150)
Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8
0 - (reserved) - 0 0 0 0 -
1 Init - 0 0 0 1 Initialisation is active
2 MotorIdent - 0 0 1 0 Motor parameter identification is acti-
ve
3 ReadyToSwitchON Prio 4 0 0 1 1 Device is ready to start
4 SwitchedON Prio 3 0 1 0 0 Device is switched on
5 OperationEnabled Prio 1 0 1 0 1 Operation
6 - (reserved) - 0 1 1 0 -
7 Trouble Prio 2 0 1 1 1 Trouble is active
8 Fault Prio 6 1 0 0 0 Fault is active
9 - (reserved) - 1 0 0 1 -
10 SafeTorqueOff Prio 5 1 0 1 0 Safe torque off is active
11 - (reserved) - 1 0 1 1 -
... ... ... ... ...
15 - (reserved) - 1 1 1 1 -
[4-1] Device states, priorities, and meaning of the status bits in the status word

4.2 Device states
________________________________________________________________
4.2.1 Init
LED DRIVE READY LED DRIVE ERROR Display in C137 Display in status word 1 (C150)
OFF OFF Init 0 0 0 1
In the "Init" device status

• is the controller directly after the supply voltage is switched on.
• the operating system is initialised.
• all device components (memory module, power section, etc.) are identified.
• the parameters are read out of the memory module.
• it is checked whether the DC-bus voltage is within the tolerance zone and the precharge relay is
closed.
• the inverter is inhibited, i.e., there is no voltage output at the motor terminals.
• the communication via diagnostic interface does not work yet.
• the application is not yet processed.
• the monitoring mode is not yet active.
• the controller cannot be parameterised yet and no device commands can be carried out yet.
 Note!
If the initialisation is completed, it changes automatically to the "ReadyToSwitchON" de-
vice state.

4.2 Device states
________________________________________________________________
4.2.2 MotorIdent
OFF MotorIdent 0 0 1 0
In the "MotorIdent" device state

• is the controller when being in the "SwitchedON" state and having activated the "Identify motor
parameters" device command and being enabled.
• the application remains active.
• all system interfaces (IO, bus systems, etc.) remain active.
• error monitoring remains active
• the inverter is controlled independently of the setpoint sources.
 Stop!
During motor parameter identification, the controller does not respond to setpoint
changes or control processes, (e.g. speed setpoints, quick stop, torque limitations).
After the motor parameter identification is completed, the state changes back to "SwitchedON".
 Tip!
Detailed information on motor parameter identification can be found in the "Automatic
motor data identification" subchapter on motor control. ( 71)
4.2.3 SafeTorqueOff
OFF SafeTorqueOff 1 0 1 0
In the "SafeTorqueOff" device state

• the controller can only be if a safety module is connected and the power section is supplied and
at least one of the two safe inputs SI1/SI2 is set to LOW level.
• the next transaction to the "ReadyToSwitchON" state takes place.
 Detailed and important information on the integrated safety system can be found in the
hardware manual!

4.2 Device states
________________________________________________________________
4.2.4 ReadyToSwitchON
OFF ReadyToSwitchON 0 0 1 1
In the "ReadyToSwitchOn" device state

• is the controller after the initialisation has been completed successfully.
• is the controller even after cancelling "Trouble", "Fault" or "SafeTorqueOff".
• I/O signalare evaluated.
• the monitoring modes are active.
• the controller can be parameterised.
• the application is basically executable.
• prevents in the Lenze setting the auto-start option "Inhibit at power-on" activated in C142 "from
changing to the "SwitchedON" state.
 Danger!
If the "Inhibit at power-on" auto-start option has been deactivated in C142, the "Ready-
ToSwitchOn" state directly switches to the "SwitchedON" state.
"Inhibit at power-on" auto-start option ( 63)

4.2 Device states
________________________________________________________________
4.2.5 SwitchedON
OFF SwitchedON 0 1 0 0
In the "SwitchedOn" device state

• is the controller if the user has inhibited the controller (and no error is pending).
• I/O signalare evaluated.
• the monitoring modes are active.
• the controller can be parameterised.
• the application is basically executable.
• it can be changed to the "OperationEnabled" state by deactivating the controller inhibit.
 Tip!
C158 provides a bit coded representation of all active sources/triggers of a controller inhi-
bit.
Depending on certain conditions, a state change takes place based on the "SwitchedOn" device sta-
te:
Change condition Changeover to the device state

Terminal RFR = HIGH level (controller enable) OperationEnabled
Motor parameter identification requested. MotorIdent
Undervoltage in the DC bus. Trouble/Fault (dependent on C600/1)
Error with error response "Trouble" occurs. Trouble

4.2 Device states
________________________________________________________________
4.2.6 OperationEnabled
OFF OperationEnabled 0 1 0 1
In the "OperationEnabled" state

• is the controller if the controller inhibit is deactivated and no trouble ("Trouble") and fault
("Fault") are existent.
• the operation is enabled and the motor follows the setpoint defined by the active application
(in case of sensorless vector control only after the magnetisation process is completed).
Depending on certain conditions, a state change takes place based on the "OperationEnabled" de-
vice state.

Terminal RFR = LOW level (controller inhibit). SwitchedON
Undervoltage in the DC bus. Trouble/Fault (dependent on C600/1)
Error with error response "Trouble" occurs. Trouble

4.2 Device states
________________________________________________________________
4.2.7 Trouble
OFF Trouble 0 1 1 1
In the "Trouble" device state

• is the controller if monitoring has caused a "Trouble" error response.
• the motor has no torque (is coasting) due to the inhibit of the inverter.
 Note!
The "Trouble" device state is automatically abandoned if the error cause has been remo-
ved.
If in C142 the "Inhibit at trouble" auto-start option is activated, an explicit deactivation
of the controller inhibit is required for leaving the state.
Depending on certain conditions a state change takes place based on the "Trouble" device state.

The error cause is no longer active. ReadyToSwitchON
Terminal RFR = HIGH level (controller enable) OperationEnabled
AND the message has been cancelled.
Related topics:
Basics on error handling in the controller ( 142)
Error messages of the operating system ( 153)

4.2 Device states
________________________________________________________________
4.2.8 Fault
OFF Fault 1 0 0 0
In the "Fault" device state

• is the controller if monitoring has caused a "Fault" error response.
• the motor has no torque (is coasting) due to the inhibit of the inverter.
The error must explicitly be reset ("acknowledged") in order to exit the device state, e.g. by the de-
vice command "Reset error".
 Note!
If an undervoltage in the DC bus of the drive controller occurs (error message "LU"), the
device changes to the "Trouble" state.
An additional error of higher priority leads the device into the "Fault" state.
According to the Device state machine, the device changes to the "ReadyToSwitchON"
state after acknowledging the error although the undervoltage is still available!
If in C142 the "Inhibit at fault" auto-start option is activated, an explicit deactivation of
the controller inhibit is required for leaving the state.
Related topics:

4.3 "Inhibit at power-on" auto-start option
________________________________________________________________
In the Lenze setting in C142 the auto-start option "Inhibit at power-on" is activated. This setting
prevents a change to the "SwitchedON"state if the controller is already enabled at mains power-up.
 Danger!
When the auto-start option "Inhibit at power-on" is deactivated, the motor can directly
start after power-on if the controller is enabled!
The following three cases describe the controller behaviour as a function of controller enable and
set auto-start option. Here, we assume that no fault and trouble exist in the controller after power-
on.

________________________________________________________________
Case 1: No controller enable at power-on

If there is no controller enable at power-on, the controller remains in the "SwitchedON" state. Only
with controller enable it is changed to the "OperationEnabled" state, independent of the setting of
the auto-start option:

5)5

W
&
2SHUDWLRQ(QDEOHG
6ZLWFKHG2Q
5HDG\7R6ZLWFK2Q
,QLW
W
Case 2: Controller enable at power-on and "Inhibit at power-on" activated

If the controller is enabled at power-on and the auto-start option "Inhibit at power-on" is active, the
controller remains in the "ReadyToSwitchON" state. In order to change to the "SwitchedON" state,
the controller enable must first be deactivated. When the controller enable is then activated, it is
changed to the "OperationEnabled" state:

5)5

W
&
2SHUDWLRQ(QDEOHG
6ZLWFKHG2Q
5HDG\7R6ZLWFK2Q
,QLW
W
Case 3: Controller enable at power-on and "Inhibit at power-on" deactivated

If in C142 the auto-start option "Inhibit at power-on" is deactivated (bit 0 = 0) and the controller is
enabled, the "ReadyToSwitchON" state switches directly to the "SwitchedON" state and afterwards
to the "OperationEnabled" state after power-on:

5)5

W
&
2SHUDWLRQ(QDEOHG
6ZLWFKHG2Q
5HDG\7R6ZLWFK2Q
,QLW
W

5 Motor control (MCTRL)
________________________________________________________________

This chapter provides information on the parameter setting of the controller's internal motor cont-
rol.
Topics:
Motor selection/Motor data
Selecting the control mode
Defining current and speed limits
V/f characteristic control (VFCplus)
Sensorless vector control (SLVC)
Parameterisable additional functions
Braking operation/braking energy management
Monitoring

5.1 Motor selection/Motor data
________________________________________________________________
The motor data term comprises all parameters that only depend on the motor and that only charac-
terise the electrical behaviour of the machine. The motor data are independent of the application in
which the controller and the motor are used.
 Proceed as follows to open the dialog for parameterising the motor data:
3. Go to the Overview dialog level and click the following button:
• Via the from Motor Catalogue button, the motor catalogue can be opened to select another mo-
tor. Selecting a motor from the motor catalogue in the »Engineer« ( 69)
• Via the From drive... button, the motor data set in the controller can be copied to the »Engineer«
when an online connection has been established.

________________________________________________________________
 Note!
Sensorless vector control in particular requires the motor data parameters to be set. The
motor data comprise the data of the motor nameplate and the data of the motor equi-
valent circuit.
If the motor has been selected via the motor catalogue of the »Engineer« or the motor
data have been adapted offline using the »Engineer«, all motor data must then be co-
pied to the controller and saved power-failure-proof to the memory module (device
command: C002/11) when an online connection has been established.
Motor data
In the parameterisation dialog, the data of the motor nameplate for the selected motor are display-
ed under "Motor data".
Parameter Info
C081 Rated motor power
C087 Rated motor speed
C088 Rated motor current
C089 Rated motor frequency
C090 Rated motor voltage
C091 Motor cos ϕ
Actual values
When an online connection to the controller has been established, the following actual values are
displayed in the parameterisation dialog under "Actual values":
Parameter Info
C051 Actual speed value
C052 Motor voltage
C053 DC-bus voltage
C054 Motor current
C066 Thermal motor load (I2xt)

________________________________________________________________
Adapting motor data manually

If a third party manufacturer's motor is used, the displayed motor data can exactly be adapted to
the real motor by clicking the From project... button and selecting the "Own motor settings" entry
from the Motor selection dialog box afterwards. For this purpose, the data of the motor nameplate
and the equivalent circuit diagram must be available.
 Tip!
For a better concentricity factor, we recommend to perform motor parameter identificati-
on of the third party manufacturer's motor first. The motor parameters can be manually
adapted afterwards.
Improving the concentricity factor includes
• the adjustment of the inverter error characteristic to the drive system and
• the knowledge of the motor cable resistance.
Both factors are determined in the course of motor parameter identification.
Automatic motor data identification ( 71)
Other motor data

Click the Other motor data... button and go to the Other motor data dialog box including the motor
equivalent circuit:
Parameter Info
C084 Motor stator resistance
C085 Motor stator leakage inductance
C092 Motor magnetising inductance
C015 VFCplus: V/f base frequency
C021 Slip compensation

________________________________________________________________
5.1.1 Selecting a motor from the motor catalogue in the »Engineer«
If a checkmark is set in the Motor control field in the "Other components" dialog when the controller
is inserted into the project, the motor for the controller can be selected from the motor catalogue in
another dialog:
• Alternatively, the motor can be inserted into the project at a later time via the Insert a
component command.
• Go to the Application parameters tab in the Overview  Motor data dialog level and click the
From motor catalogue... button to also reach the motor catalogue for the selection of another
motor.

________________________________________________________________
Accepting the default values of the motor

If a motor is selected from the motor catalogue at a later time, the Use motor's default values dialog
box is displayed afterwards which includes all motor data of the selected motor. Please select here
which of the default values are to be copied to the controller:
 Tip!
If a third party manufacturer's motor is used, select a Lenze motor from the motor cata-
logue first which is similar in terms of current, voltage and speed rating. Adapt the prese-
lected motor data exactly to the real motor afterwards.

________________________________________________________________
5.1.2 Automatic motor data identification
Via the "Identify motor parameters" device command " (C002/23), the inverter characteristic, the in-
fluences of the motor cable, and the motor parameters listed in the table below can be identified
automatically:
Parameter Info
C015 V/f base frequency
C016 Vmin boost
C095 Motor magnetising current
 Danger!
During motor parameter identification, the motor is energised via the outputs U, V and
W of the controller!
Observe the corresponding safety instructions!
 Stop!
If motor parameter identification is aborted, unstable drive behaviour may be the result!
 Note!
• We strongly recommend motor parameter identification before the initial commis-
sioning of the sensorless vector control (SLVC).
• The motor parameter identification must be carried out when the motor is cold!
• The load machine may remain connected. Holding brakes, if present, may remain in
the braking position.
• With an idling motor, a small angular offset may occur at the motor shaft.
• The amplitude of the rated motor current (C088) is injected to identify the stator re-
sistance. If the rated motor current amounts to less than 60 % of the rated inverter
current, at least 60 % of the rated inverter current will be injected to ensure sufficient
motor parameter identification accuracy.

________________________________________________________________
Preconditions
The motor parameters listed in the table below are excluded from automatic identification and
must therefore be adapted to the used motor before motor parameter identification is carried out
(see motor nameplate).
Parameter Info
C091 Motor cos ϕ
Duration & sequence of the motor parameter identification

The duration of the motor parameter identification is approx. 30 s. The following steps are carried
out during this time:
1. The motor stator resistance (C084) is measured.
2. The inverter error characteristic is measured.
3. The motor stator leakage inductance (C085) is measured
4. The motor magnetising inductance (C092) is measured
5. The motor magnetising current (C095) is measured.
6. The V/f base frequency (C015) is calculated.
7. The slip compensation (C021) is calculated.
8. The Vminboost (C016) is detected.
 Note!
Motor parameter identification may be aborted if a special motor (e.g. mid-frequency
motor) is used or if there is a large deviation between inverter and motor power.
Another cause for the abort of the motor parameter identification could be the implau-
sibility of the entered nameplate data, e.g. the entry P = 0 kW for the motor power.

________________________________________________________________
 How to carry out automatic motor parameter identification:

1. Inhibit the controller if it is enabled, e.g. via the C002/16 device command or a LOW signal
at the X4/RFR terminal.
2. Wait until the drive is at standstill.
3. Transfer the nameplate data to the following codes:
• C081: Rated motor power
• C087: Rated motor speed
• C088: Rated motor current (according to the connection method /)
• C089: Rated motor frequency (according to the connection method /)
• C090: Rated motor voltage (according to the connection method /)
• C091: Motor cos ϕ
4. Start motor parameter identification via the C002/23 device command.
5. Enable the controller again.
• Motor parameter identification starts.
• The progress of the identification can be seen in C002/23.
• The identification is completed if the "0: Off / ready" message is displayed in C002/23.
6. Inhibit controller again.

5.2 Selecting the control mode
________________________________________________________________
The 8400 BaseLine D controller supports various modes for motor control (open loop or closed loop).
• V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) with linear characteristic is preset.
• The control mode can be selected in the »Engineer« on the Application parameter tab via the
Motor control (C006) list field:
• A click on the Motor control... button leads you to the parameterisation dialog of the selected
motor control. (The button is labelled according to the selected motor control.)
 Tip!
In order to make the selection of the motor control easier, we provide a selection help with
recommendations and alternatives for standard applications in the subchapter entitled
"Selection help". ( 76)
The following section briefly describe the control modes. A reference to more details can be found
at the end of each section.

________________________________________________________________
V/f characteristic control (VFCplus)

The V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) is a motor control mode for standard frequency inverter ap-
plications based on a simple and robust control process which is suitable for the operation of ma-
chines with linear or square-law load torque characteristic (e.g. fans). Furthermore, this motor
control mode is also suitable for group drives and special motors. Due to the low parameterisation
effort, commissioning of such applications is fast and easy.
The Vminboost (C016) and slip compensation (C021) required for optimising the drive behaviour are
dimensioned for machines with power adaptations to the inverter in the Lenze setting.
V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) ( 79)
Sensorless vector control (SLVC)

Sensorless (field-oriented) vector control is based on a decoupled, separate control for the torque-
producing and the field-producing current component. In addition, the actual speed is reconstruc-
ted by means of a motor model so that a speed sensor is not required.
Sensorless vector control (SLVC) ( 88)
In comparison to the V/f characteristic control without feedback, the following can be achieved by
means of sensorless vector control SLVC:
• A higher maximum torque throughout the entire speed range
• A higher speed accuracy
• A higher concentricity factor
• A higher level of efficiency
• The implementation of torque-actuated operation with speed limitation
• The limitation of the maximum torque in motor and generator mode for speed-actuated opera-
tion
V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) Sensorless vector control (SLVC)
M M
1 0 1 0
MN MN
-nN nN n -nN nN n
-MN -MN
2 3 2 3
9300vec092 9300vec095
 Operation in motor mode (CW rotation)  Operation in generator mode (CCW rotation)
 Operation in motor mode (CCW rotation)  Operation in generator mode (CW rotation)
 Tip!
If a high torque without feedback is to be provided at small speeds, we recommend the
"Sensorless vector control" motor control mode.

________________________________________________________________
5.2.1 Selection help
To ease the selection of the motor control mode, the two following tables contain recommendati-
ons and alternatives to standard applications.
Application Recommended Alternatively

Single drives
With constant load VFCplus: V/f linear SLVC
With extremely alternating loads VFCplus: V/f linear SLVC
With high starting duty SLVC VFCplus: V/f linear
Torque limitation SLVC -
With torque limitation (power control) VFCplus: V/f linear SLVC
Three-phase reluctance motor VFCplus: V/f linear -
Three-phase sliding rotor motor VFCplus: V/f linear -
Three-phase AC motors with permanently assigned frequen- VFCplus: V/f linear -
cy/voltage characteristic
Pump and fan drives with quadratic load characteristic VFCplus: V/f quadratic VFCplus or SLVC
Simple hoists VFCplus: V/f linear -
Group drives (several motors connected to controller)
Identical motors and loads VFCplus: V/f linear -
Different motors and/or alternating loads VFCplus: V/f linear -
[5-1] Standard applications without speed feedback

5.3 Defining current and speed limits
________________________________________________________________
Limitation of the speed setpoint

Parameterising the reference speed in C011 means that the drive must rotate at the set speed if a
speed setpoint of 100% is specified
All speed setpoint selections are provided in % and always refer to the reference speed set in C011.
 Tip!
For reasons of achievable resolution and the accuracy involved, the reference speed should
be geared to the speed range required for the respective application.
Lenze recommendation: Reference speed (C011) = 1500 ... 3000 rpm
Irrespective of the selected motor control, there are more limitation options:

Value Unit
C909/1 Max. positive speed 120 %

C909/2 Max. negative speed 120 %
C910/1 Max. positive output frequency 1000 Hz
C910/2 Max. negative output frequency 1000 Hz
Current limitation in motor and generator mode

In the various motor control modes, the controller is provided with functions which determine the
dynamic behaviour under load and counteract exceedance of the maximum current in motor or ge-
nerator mode.

Value Unit
C022 Imax in motor mode 47.00 A

C023 Imax in generator mode 100 %
• 100 % ≡ Imax in motor mode (C022)
The current limits must be selected depending on

• the permissible maximum current of the motor  recommendation: I(Mot)N < 1.5 ... 2.0
• the permissible maximum current of the inverter
• the torque in motor/generator mode required for the application

________________________________________________________________
 Note!
Highly dynamic applications
(that have e.g. too short acceleration/deceleration times or excessively changing loads)
The overcurrent disconnection may respond (fault message OC1), if the setting of the
maximum current in motor mode in C022 approximately corresponds to the maximum
permissible value of the respective inverter.
Remedies:
• Increase of the acceleration and deceleration ramp times
• Reduction of the maximum current in motor mode (C022)
• Reduction of the maximum current in generator mode (C023)
• Adaptation of the indirect peak current limitation (procedure depends on the selected
motor control mode, see below)
• Reduction of the reset time of the current limiting controller (C074/1)
Influencing the torque in motor/generator mode

The torque in motor and generator mode can be limited via the nTorqueMotLim and
nTorqueGenLim process signal inputs.
• If V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) is selected, limitation is indirectly performed via
a so-called Imax controller.
• If sensorless vector control (SLVC) is selected, the limitation has a direct effect on the
torque-producing current component.
If keypad control is selected, the nTorqueMotLim and nTorqueGenLim process signals can
be parameterised via C728/1...2.
 How to adapt the peak current limitation:

V/f characteristic control (VFCplus):
• Reduce the slip compensation with C021.
V/f control (VFCplus + encoder):
• Reduce Vminboost inC016.
Sensorless vector control (SLVC):
• Reduce the slip compensation with C021.
• Reduce the limitation of the torque in motor mode via nTorqueMotLimit_a (C728/1) and
the limitation of the torque in generator mode via nTorqueGenLimit_a (C728/2).

5.4 V/f characteristic control (VFCplus)
________________________________________________________________
In case of the V/f characteristic control (VFCplus), the motor voltage of the inverter is determined by
means of a linear or quadratic characteristic depending on the field frequency or motor speed to be
generated. The voltage follows a preselected characteristic.
 Stop!
• The following must be observed when operating drives with quadratic V/f characteri-
stic:
• Please always check whether the corresponding drive is suitable for operation with
a quadratic V/f characteristic!
• If your pump drive or fan drive is not suitable for operation with a quadratic V/f
characteristic, you must use either use the V/f characteristic control function with
a linear V/f characteristic or the sensorless vector control (SLVC).
• For adjustment, observe the thermal performance of the connected asynchronous
motor at low output frequencies.
• Usually, standard asynchronous motors with insulation class B can be operated for
a short time with their rated current in the frequency range 0 Hz ≤ f ≤ 25 Hz.
• Contact the motor manufacturer to get the exact setting values for the max. per-
missible motor current of self-ventilated motors in the lower speed range.
• If you select the quadratic V/f characteristic, we recommend to set a lower Vmin.
• The nameplate data of the motor (at least rated speed and rated frequency) must be
entered if, instead of a standard motor, an asynchronous motor is used with the fol-
lowing values:
• rated frequency ≠ 50 Hz (star) or
• rated frequency ≠ 87 Hz (delta) or
• number of pole pairs ≠ 2
 Note!
When the auto DCB threshold is set (C019) > 0 rpm, there is no torque at the motor shaft
in the lower speed range!
Automatic DC-injection braking (Auto-DCB) ( 98)
5.4.1 Parameterisation dialog/signal flow
 Proceed as follows to open the dialog for parameterising the motor control:
3. Select the motor control from the Overview dialog level in the Motor control list field:
• "6: VFCplus: V/f linear" for linear characteristic or
• "8: VFCplus: V/f quadr" for square-law characteristic
4. Click the Motor control V/f button to change to the Overview  Motor control V/f dialog
box.

80
________________________________________________________________
5.4
5
V/f characteristic control (VFCplus)
Motor control (MCTRL)
Lenze · 8400 BaseLine D · Reference manual · DMS 5.5 EN · 01/2014 · TD05
Parameter Info Parameter Info Parameter Info

1 C022 Imax in motor mode 9 C021 Slip compensation 13 C006 Motor control
2 C023 Imax in generator mode 10 C058 Output frequency 14 C015 V/f base frequency
3 C074 Ti Imax controller 11 C910/1 Max. pos. output frequency 15 C016 Vmin boost
4 C073 Vp Imax controller 12 C910/2 Max. neg. output frequency 16 C018 Switching frequency
5 C050 Speed setpoint
6 C909/1 Max. pos. speed
7 C909/2 Max. neg. speed
8 C105 Deceleration time - quick stop
________________________________________________________________
5.4.2 Basic settings
The "Initial commissioning steps" listed in the table below are sufficient for a simple characteristic
control.
• Detailed information on the individual steps can be found in the following subchapters.
Initial commissioning steps

1. Defining the V/f characteristic shape. ( 81)
2. Defining current limits (Imax controller). ( 82)
 Tip!
Information on the optimisation of the control mode and the adaptation to the real appli-
cation is provided in the "Optimise control behaviour" chapter. ( 83)
Parameterisable additional functions are described correspondingly in the
"Parameterisable additional functions" chapter. ( 93)
5.4.2.1 Defining the V/f characteristic shape

Generally, two different characteristic shapes can be defined:
1. Linear V/f characteristic:
For drives for a constant, speed-independent load torque.
2. Quadratic V/f characteristic:
For drives with a load torque curve which is quadratic or in relation to speed. Quadratic V/f cha-
racteristics are preferred in the case of centrifugal pumps and fan drives.
Uout Uout
100 % 100 %
Umin Umin
0 0
0 1 n 0 1 n
nN nN
[5-2] Principle of a linear and quadratic V/f characteristic
The V/f characteristic shape is defined by selecting the corresponding motor control mode in C006:
• "6: VFCplus: V/f linear" for linear characteristic
• "8: VFCplus: V/f quadr" for square-law characteristic

________________________________________________________________
5.4.2.2 Defining current limits (Imax controller)

The V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) is provided with a current limitation control which is decisi-
ve for the dynamic behaviour under load and counteracts exceedance of the maximum current in
motor or generator mode. This current limitation control is called Imax control.
• The efficiency (motor current) measured by the Imax control is compared with the current limit
value for motor load set in C022 and the current limit value for generator mode set in C023.
• If the current limit values are exceeded, the controller changes its dynamic behaviour.
Motor overload during acceleration

The controller prolongs the acceleration ramp to keep the current on or below the current limit.
Generator overload during deceleration

The controller prolongs the deceleration ramp to keep the current on or below the current limit.
Increasing load with constant speed

• If the motor current limit value is reached:
• The controller reduces the effective speed setpoint until a stable working point is set or an
effective speed setpoint of 0 rpm is reached.
• If the load is reduced, the controller increases the effective speed setpoint until the setpoint
speed is reached or the load reaches the current limit value again.
• When the generator current limit value is reached:
• The controller increases the effective speed setpoint until a stable working point is set or the
maximally permissible speed (C909) or output frequency (C910).
• If the load is reduced, the controller reduces the effective speed setpoint until the setpoint
speed is reached or the load reaches the current limit value again.
• If a sudden load is built up at the motor shaft (e.g. drive is blocked), the overcurrent disconnec-
tion may respond (fault message OC1).

________________________________________________________________
5.4.3 Optimise control behaviour
The V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) is generally ready for operation. It can be adapted subse-
quently by adapting the characteristic and/or the drive behaviour.
Adapting characteristic
For the linear and quadratic characteristic, it is also possible to match its curve to different load pro-
files or motors by adapting the V/f base frequency (C015) and the Vmin-boost (C016) .
Adapting the V/f base frequency ( 84)
Adapting the Vmin boost ( 85)
Adapting drive behaviour

• Limitation of the maximum current by a current limitation controller (e.g. to prevent the motor
from stalling or to limit to the maximally permissible motor current). Optimising the Imax
controller ( 86)
• Adaptation of the field frequency by a load-dependent slip compensation (improved speed ac-
curacy for systems without feedback)

________________________________________________________________
5.4.3.1 Adapting the V/f base frequency

The V/f base frequency (C015) determines the slope of the V/f characteristic and has considerable
influence on the current, torque, and power performance of the motor.
• The setting in C015 applies to all permitted mains voltages.
• Mains fluctuations or fluctuations of the DC-bus voltage (operation in generator mode) do not
need to be considered when the V/f base frequency is set. They are automatically compensated
for by the internal mains voltage compensation of the device.
• Depending on the setting in C015, it may be required to adapt the reference speed (C011) to tra-
verse the entire speed range of the motor.
• In standard applications, the V/f base frequency (C015) is set to the value of the rated motor fre-
quency (C089) as a typical value and corresponds to the data of the motor nameplate.
• Reference voltage for the V/f base frequency is the rated motor voltage (C090) according to mo-
tor nameplate.
 Note!
87-Hz operation
4-pole asynchronous motors which are designed for a rated frequency of f = 50 Hz in star
connection can be operated in delta connection when being constantly excited up to f =
87 Hz.
• Advantages:
• Higher speed-setting range
• 73% higher power output in case of standard motors
• Motor current and motor power increase by the factor 3 .
• The field weakening range starts above 87 Hz.
• Generally, this process can also be used with motors which have different numbers of
pole pairs. In case of 2-pole asynchronous motors, the mechanical limit speed must be
maintained.

________________________________________________________________
5.4.3.2 Adapting the Vmin boost

The Vminboost (C016) of the motor voltage serves to select a load independent magnetising current
which is required for asynchronous motors. The torque behaviour of the motor can be optimised by
adapting the setting in C016.
 Note!
The Vminboost has an effect on output frequencies below the V/f base frequency (C015).
The general linear and quadratic V/f characteristics are shown in the illustrations below. The illust-
rations show the impacts of the parameters used to adapt the characteristic shape.
V out [V] 1/N/PE AC 264 V V out [V]

3/PE AC 264 V 1/N/PE AC 264 V
3/PE AC 550 V 3/PE AC 264 V
3/PE AC 550 V
V rmot V rmot
(100 %) (100 %)
1/N/PE AC 180 V 1/N/PE AC 180 V
3/PE AC 100 V 3/PE AC 100 V
3/PE AC 320 V 3/PE AC 320 V
C00016 C00016
C00016
2
C00015 C00015 f [Hz] C00015 f [Hz]
2
[5-3] Representation of the linear V/f characteristic (on the left) and quadratic V/f characteristic (on the right)
 To set the V min boost, proceed as follows:

1. Operate motor in idle state at approx. 6 % of the rated motor speed.
2. Increase Vminboost (C016) until the following motor current is reached:
Motor in short-time operation up to 0.5 nN
• for self-ventilated motors: IMotor ≈ IN Motor
• for forced ventilated motors: IMotor ≈ IN Motor
Motor in continuous operation up to 0.5 nN
• for self-ventilated motors: IMotor ≈ 0.8 IN Motor
• for forced ventilated motors: IMotor ≈ IN Motor
 Note!
Vmin boost is automatically calculated by the motor parameter identification using the
data specified on the motor nameplate so that a no-load current of approx. 0.8 Irated
motor results at the slip frequency of the machine.

________________________________________________________________
5.4.3.3 Optimising the Imax controller

Using the Lenze setting of the current limitation controller, the drive is stable:

Value Unit
C073 VFC: Vp Imax controller 0.25

C074 VFC: Ti Imax controller 65 ms
Most applications do not require optimisation.

The setting of the current limitation controller must be adapted if
• power control including great moments of inertia is performed.
• Recommendation: Increase of the reset time Ti (C074) of the Imaxcontroller.
• overcurrent errors occur due to load impulses or too high acceleration ramps.
• Recommendation: Reduction of the gain Vp (C073) and reset time Ti (C074) of the Imax cont-
roller.
5.4.3.4 Torque limitation

The previous chapter, "Optimising the Imax controller", describes how the drive can be protected
from overload. During commissioning, these settings are carried out once and remain unchanged
afterwards. However, it is often necessary to limit the torque to a lower value for plant or process
reasons.
• To avoid overload in the drive train, the torque in motor mode can be limited via the
nTorqueMotLimit_a process input signal, and the torque in generator mode can be limited via
the nTorqueGenLimit_a process input signal:
Identifier Information/possible settings

DIS code | data type
nTorqueMotLimit_a Torque limitation in motor mode

C830/4 | INT • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % Mmax (C057)
• Setting range: 0 … +199.9 %
• If keypad control is performed: Parameterisable via C728/1.
nTorqueGenLimit_a Torque limitation in generator mode
• Setting range: -199.9 ... 0 %
 Note!
• The accuracy of the torque limitation is limited because the actual torque (C056/2) is
only calculated from the slip speed measured indirectly via the motor current. For this
purpose, the correct entry of the motor data is required. Motor selection/Motor
data ( 66)
• To avoid instabilities during operation with active slip compensation, the torque limit
values are internally processed as absolute values.
• If slip compensation is deactivated (C021 = 0) indirect torque limitation is executed
(differential signal between apparent motor current and nTorqueMotLimit_a or
nTorqueGenLimit_a). Above the no-load current of the motor, the accuracy of the in-
direct torque limitation is limited.

________________________________________________________________
5.4.4 Remedies for undesired drive behaviour
Drive behaviour Remedy

Inadequately smooth running at low speeds, especially Automatic motor data identification ( 71)
in the case of operation with a long motor cable
Problems in case of high starting duty (great mass iner- Adapting the Vmin boost ( 85)
tia)
Drive does not follow the speed setpoint. The current controller intervenes in the set field frequen-
cy to limit the controller output current to the maximum
current (C0022, C0023). Therefore:
• Prolong acceleration/deceleration time:
C012: Acceleration time - main setpoint
C013: Deceleration time - main setpoint
• Consider a sufficient magnetising time of the motor.
Depending on the motor power, the magnetising
time amounts to 0.1 ... 0.2 s.
• Increase permissible maximum current:
C022: Imax in motor mode
C023: Imax in generator mode)
Insufficient speed constancy at high load (setpoint and • Increase slip compensation (C021).
motor speed are not proportional anymore) Important: Unstable drive due to overcompensation!
• With cyclic load impulses (e. g. centrifugal pump), a
smooth motor characteristic is achieved by smaller
values in C021 (possibly negative values).
Controller cannot follow dynamic processes, i.e. too • Increase the gain of the Imax controller (C073)
short acceleration/deceleration times in terms of load • Reduce the reset time of the Imax controller(C074)
ratios. • Increase acceleration time (C012
• Increase deceleration time (C013)

5.5 Sensorless vector control (SLVC)
________________________________________________________________
Sensorless vector control (SLVC) is based on a better motor current control according to the Lenze
FTC process.
 Stop!
• The connected motor must not be more than two power classes smaller than the mo-
tor assigned to the controller.
• Operation of the sensorless vector control (SLVC) is only permissible for one single dri-
ve!
• Operation of the sensorless vector control (SLVC) is not permissible for hoists!
• The Lenze setting permits the operation of a power-adapted motor. Optimal operati-
on is only possible if either:
• the motor is selected via the Lenze motor catalogue
• the motor nameplate data are entered and motor parameter identification is car-
ried out afterwards
- or -
• the nameplate data and equivalent circuit data of the motor (motor leakage induc-
tance and mutual motor inductance, slip compensation and motor stator resis-
tance) are entered manually.
• When you enter the motor nameplate data, take into account the phase connection
implemented for the motor (star or delta connection). Only enter the data applying to
the selected connection type.
• In this context, also observe the instructions in the chapter entitled "Adapting the
V/f base frequency" relating to V/f characteristic control. ( 84)
 Note!
Optimal operation of the sensorless vector control (SLVC) can be achieved from a mini-
mum speed of approx. 0.5-fold slip speed. At lower speed values below the 0.5-fold slip
speed, the maximum torque is reduced.
The maximum field frequency with this motor control mode is 650 Hz.
In comparison to the V/f characteristic control without feedback, the following can be achieved by
means of sensorless vector control SLVC:
• A higher maximum torque throughout the entire speed range
• A higher speed accuracy
• A higher concentricity factor
• A higher level of efficiency
• The limitation of the maximum torque in motor and generator mode for speed-actuated opera-
tion

________________________________________________________________
5.5.1 Parameterisation dialog
 Proceed as follows to open the dialog for parameterising the motor control:
3. Select the motor control "4: SLVC: Vector control" from the Overview dialog level in the
Motor control (C006) list field.
4. Click the Motor control vector button to change to the Overview  Motor control vector di-
alog box.
• This dialog level lists shows all relevant parameters in a parameter list.
Short overview of the relevant parameters:
Parameter Info
C006 Selection of the motor control
 "4: SLVC: Vector control"
C011 Reference speed
C018 Switching frequency
C022 Imax in motor mode
C023 Imax in generator mode
C050 Speed setpoint
C057 Maximum torque
C058 Output frequency
C091 Motor cosine phi
C095 Motor magnetising current
C097 Rated motor torque
C105 Deceleration time - quick stop
C909/1 Max. pos. speed
C909/2 Max. neg. speed
C910/1 Max. pos. output frequency
C910/2 Max. neg. output frequency
5.5.2 Speed control with torque limitation
A speed setpoint is selected and the drive system is operated in a speed-controlled manner.

________________________________________________________________
The operational performance can be adapted in the following ways:

• Overload limitation in the drive train
• The torque is limited via the torque setpoint.
• The torque setpoint is identical to the value at the output of the speed controller,
nOutputSpeedCtrl.
• To avoid overload in the drive train, the torque in motor mode can be limited via the
nTorqueMotLimit_a process input signal, and the torque in generator mode can be limited via
the nTorqueGenLimit_a process input signal:

nTorqueMotLimit_a Torque limitation in motor mode

• Setting range: 0 … +199.9 %
nTorqueGenLimit_a Torque limitation in generator mode
• Setting range: -199.9 ... 0 %
 Note!
To avoid instabilities during operation, the torque limit values are internally processed
as absolute values.
• Motor current limitation

• A cross current setpoint is calculated from the torque setpoint which is limited depending on
the magnetising current, the max. current in motor mode (C022) and the max. current in ge-
nerator mode (C023).
• Here, the total current injected into the motor does not exceed the max. currents in motor
and generator mode.
• Slip compensation ( 100)
• Using a slip model, the slip of the machine is reconstructed.
• The slip compensation (C021) acts as the influencing parameter.

________________________________________________________________
5.5.3 Basic settings
The following "Initial commissioning steps" must be performed to commission the sensorless vector
control:
Initial commissioning steps

1. Set the motor selection/motor data
• When selecting and parameterising the motor, the motor nameplate data and the equivalent circuit di-
agram data are relevant. Detailed information can be found in the "Motor selection/Motor data" chapter.
( 66)
Depending on the motor manufacturer, proceed as follows:
Lenze motor: Third party manufacturer's motor:
Selecting a motor from the motor catalogue in the 1. Set the motor nameplate data
»Engineer« 2. Automatic motor data identification or set known
- or - data of the equivalent circuit diagram manually:
1. Set the motor nameplate data C084: Motor stator resistance
2. Automatic motor data identification C085: Motor stator leakage inductance
C092: Motor magnetising inductance
C095: Motor magnetising current
2. Determine the motor control:
C006 = "4: SLVC: Vector control"
3. Set slip compensation (C021). Slip compensation ( 100)
 Tip!
We recommend to use the flying restart function for connecting/synchronising the inverter
to an already rotating drive system.Flying restart function ( 95)
Parameterisable additional functions are described correspondingly in the
"Parameterisable additional functions" chapter. ( 93)
5.5.4 Optimise control behaviour
5.5.4.1 Optimising the starting performance after a controller enable

After the controller is enabled, a time delay is cause during the start due to the magnetisation of the
motor. If this delay cannot be tolerated for specific applications, the motor must always be operated
in an energised condition.
Procedure without setting a controller inhibit

1. Deactivate the auto-DCB function with C019 = 0.
2. Do not activate the controller inhibit. Instead, stop the drive by selecting a setpoint of 0 or by
activating the quick stop function.

________________________________________________________________
5.5.5 Remedies for undesired drive behaviour
Drive behaviour Remedy

Deviation between no-load current and magnetising Adapt the motor magnetising inductance (C092) for no-
current or bad speed or torque accuracy. load operation.
• If the no-load current is greater than the magnetising
current (C095) at 0.5-fold rated motor speed, the ma-
gnetising inductance must be reduced until the no-
load current and the magnetising current have the
same values.
• Otherwise, the magnetising inductance must be in-
creased.
Tendency of the correction of C092:
+15 %
92
C00
0
-15 %
0,37 22 90 PN [kW]
PN: Rated motor power

Insufficient speed constancy at high load: Setpoint and Via the slip compensation (C021, the speed stability un-
motor speed are not proportional anymore. der high loads can be affected:
Caution: Overcompensation of the settings mentioned • If nact > nslip, reduce the value in C021
under " Remedy" may result in unstable behaviour! • If nact < nslip, increase the value in C021
Unstable control with higher speeds. • Check the setting of the magnetising inductance
(C092) by comparing the current consumption in no-
load operation with the rated magnetising current
(C095)
• Optimise oscillation damping (C234).
"Short circuit" (OC1) error messages at short acceleration Increase acceleration time (C012)/deceleration time
time (C012) in proportion to the load (controller cannot (C013).
follow the dynamic processes).
Mechanical resonance at certain speeds. The L_NSet_1 function block masks out those speed ran-
ges that include resonance.
Speed variations in no-load operation for speeds > 1/3 Minimise speed oscillations with oscillation damping
rated speed. (C234).
Drive runs unstable. Check set motor data (nameplate data and equivalent
circuit diagram data).
Setpoint speed and actual speed differ strongly.
Motor selection/Motor data ( 66)

5.6 Parameterisable additional functions
________________________________________________________________
5.6.1 Selection of switching frequency
The switching frequency of the inverter that can be selected in C018 influences the smooth running
performance and the noise generation in the connected motor as well as the power losses in the
controller.
The lower the switching frequency the higher the concentricity factor, the smaller the losses, and
the higher the noise generation.
 Stop!
If operated at a switching frequency of 16 kHz, the output current of the controller must
not exceed the current limit values specified in the technical data!
Defining current and speed limits ( 77)
 Note!
• Operate mid-frequency motors only at a switching frequency of 8 kHz or 16 kHz
(var./drive-opt.).
• If operated at a switching frequency of 16 kHz, the Ixt evaluation (C064) is considered
including the required derating to 67 % of the rated device current at switching fre-
quencies of 2.4 and 8 kHz.
Settable switching frequencies
Selection in C018 Info

1 4 kHz var./drive-optimised • "var.": Adaptation of the switching frequency depending on the
current
2 8 kHz var./drive-optimised
• "drive-opt.": drive-optimised modulation ("sine/delta modulati-
3 16 kHz var./drive-optimised on")
5 2 kHz constant/drive-optimised • "fixed": fixed switching frequencies
6 4 kHz constant/drive-optimised
21 8 kHz var./drive-opt./4 kHz min
 Tip!
The Lenze setting C018 = 2 (8 kHz var./drive-opt.) is the optimal value for standard applica-
tions.

________________________________________________________________
Lowering the switching frequency due to high heatsink temperatures

Exceeding the maximally permissible heatsink temperature would lead to an inhibited drive due to
the "Overtemperature" error and a torquelessly coasting motor. Therefore, if the Lenze setting is se-
lected, the switching frequency is reduced to the next frequency below when the heatsink tempe-
rature has risen to 5 °C below the maximally permissible temperature. After the heatsink has cooled
down, the controller automatically switches to the next frequency above until the set switching fre-
quency is reached.
Switching frequency reduction due to high heatsink temperature can be deactivated via C144 . If the
switching frequency reduction is deactivated, the "OH1: Heatsink overtemperature" error message
will be issued when the maximally permissible heatsink temperature is reached. An "Error" response
is the result and the motor is coasting.

C144 Switching frequency reduction (temp.) 1: On
Lowering of the switching frequency depending on the output current

"Variable" switching frequencies can be selected for the controller in C018, where the controller au-
tomatically lowers the switching frequency depending on the controller output current. The modu-
lation mode will not be changed. The changeover thresholds are included in the rated data of the
Hardware Manual (the Hardware Manual is available on the CD included in the scope of supply).
When a "fixed" switching frequency is selected, no switching frequency changeover takes place. In
case of fixed frequencies, the controller output current is limited to the permissible value of the cor-
responding switching frequency. In case of larger load impulses, the overcurrent interruption may
be activated, to which the controller responds with "Error".
Limiting the maximum output frequency

The maximum output frequency (C910) of the controller is not limited depending on the switching
frequency. Therefore, adapt the maximum output frequency according to our recommendation:
1
Maximum output frequency ≤ --- Switching frequency
8
• At a switching frequency of 4 kHz, for instance, 500 Hz for the maximum output frequency
should not be exceeded.
Carry out further measures:
• If required, deactivate the switching frequency changeover by the heatsink temperature via
C144.
• If required, ensure that the changeover threshold of the controller output current to the next
switching frequency below will not be exceeded. If required, select a constant switching fre-
quency in C018.
Display of the current switching frequency

The current switching frequency applied in the controller is displayed in C725.
Operation at an ambient temperature of 45°C

The controller is designed so that operation at an ambient temperature of 45° C without derating is
permissible at a switching frequency of 4 kHz.

________________________________________________________________
5.6.2 Flying restart function
The flying restart circuit uses a simple model of an asynchronous motor which requires knowledge
of the motor stator resistance RS and the rated motor current.
 Note!
• For a correct functioning of the flying restart circuit, we recommend to perform a pa-
rameter identification first. Automatic motor data identification ( 71)
• The flying restart function works safely and reliably for drives with great centrifugal
masses.
• Do not use the flying restart function if several motors with different centrifugal mas-
ses are connected to a controller.
• After the controller is enabled, the motor can start for a short time or reverse when
machines with low friction and low mass inertia are used.
• The flying restart function serves to identify max. field frequencies up to ±200 Hz.
• When power-adapted standard asynchronous motors are used (rated motor power
approximately corresponds to the rated inverter power), a motor parameter identifi-
cation is not required.
 Tip!
In association with the flying restart function, we recommend to read the information pro-
vided in this documentation on the following topic:
General information
This function serves to activate a mode which is used to "catch" a coasting motor during operation
without speed feedback. This means that the synchronicity between controller and motor is to be
adjusted in such a way that a jerk-free transition to the rotating machines is achieved in the instant
of connection.
The drive controller determines the synchronicity by identifying the synchronous field frequency.
Duration
The "catching" process is completed after approx. 1 ... 2 seconds. The duration is influenced by the
starting value. If the field frequency is not known, we recommend the preset starting value of 10 Hz.

Value Unit
C990 Flying restart fct.: Activation Off

C991 Flying restart fct.: Process -n...+n | Last output frequency
C992 Flying restart: Start frequency 10 Hz
C994 Flying restart fct.: Current 25.00 %

________________________________________________________________
 How to parameterise the flying restart function:

1. Activate the flying restart circuit by selecting "1: On" in C990.
• Every time the controller is enabled, a synchronisation to the rotating or standing drive
is carried out.
When the Lenze setting is used, most applications do not require additional controller set-
tings.
If additional settings are necessary, proceed as follows:
2. Define the process and hence the speed range/rotational frequency range in C991 which is
to be examined by the flying restart circuit.
• We recommend the Lenze setting "5: -n...+n | Last output frequency"
3. Adjust setting in C992 if required.
The preset starting frequency which defines the starting point of the flying restart function
is optimised for standard motors.
• We recommend to define a starting frequency of approximately 20 % of the rated motor
frequency to enable a safe and fast connection to standing drive systems.
4. Set the flying restart current in C994.
We recommend setting a flying restart current of 10 % ... 25 % of the rated motor current.
• During a flying restart process, a current is injected into the motor to identify the speed.
• Reducing the current causes a reduction of the motor torque during the flying restart
process. A short-time starting action or reversing of the motor is prevented with low
flying restart currents.
• An increase of the current improves the robustness of the flying restart function.

________________________________________________________________
5.6.3 DC-injection braking
 Danger!
Holding braking is not possible when this braking mode is used!
DC-injection braking allows the drive to be quickly braked to a standstill without the need to use an
external brake resistor.
• The braking current is set in C036.
• The maximum braking torque to be generated by the DC braking current is approx. 20 ... 30 %
of the rated motor torque. It is lower than that for braking in generator mode with an external
brake resistor.
• Automatic DC-injection braking (Auto-DCB) improves the starting performance of the motor
when operated without speed feedback.
 Tip!
DC-injection braking has the advantage that it is possible to influence the braking time by
changing the motor current or the braking torque..

Value Unit
C019 Auto-DCB: Threshold 3 rpm

• Operating threshold for activating DC-injection
braking
C036 DCB: Current 50 %
• Braking current in [%] based on Imax (C022)
C106 Auto-DCB: Hold time 0.5 s
C107 DCB: Hold time 999.0 s
C701/4 LA_NCtrl: bSetDCBrake Dependent on the selected
• Selection of the signal source for activating DC-in- control mode
jection braking
Method
DC-injection braking can be carried out in two ways with different types of activation:
Manual DC-injection braking (DCB) ( 98)

________________________________________________________________
5.6.3.1 Manual DC-injection braking (DCB)

DC-injection braking can be manually activated via the bSetDCBrake process input.
• For HIGH-active inputs, DC-injection braking is active as long as the signal is at HIGH level.
• After the hold time ((C107) has expired, the controller sets the pulse inhibit (CINH).
 Tip!
• In the preset "Terminals 0" control mode, DC-injection braking can be manually activa-
ted via the digital input DI3.
• In the preset "Terminals 11" control mode, DC-injection braking can be manually activa-
ted via the digital input DI2.
5.6.3.2 Automatic DC-injection braking (Auto-DCB)

"Automatic DC-injection braking" (referred to in the following as "Auto-DCB") can be used if there is
a requirement that the drive be isolated from the supply at n ≈ 0.
Function
For understanding the auto-DCB function, it is necessary to distinguish between three different ty-
pes of operation:
A. The drive has been enabled and, in the course of operation, the speed setpoint falls below the
Auto-DCB threshold.
• In case of operation without speed feedback, a braking current (C036) is injected. After the
auto-DCB hold time (C106) has expired, the motor is deenergised via the auto-DCB function,
i.e. a controller inhibit (CINH) is set.
B. When the controller is enabled, the drive is at standstill (n = 0).
If the enabled drive is to start, the speed setpoint passed via the acceleration ramp must exceed
the auto-DCB threshold (C019). Below this threshold, the motor will not be energised.
C. When the controller is enabled, the motor (still) rotates at a speed which is above the auto DCB
threshold. If the speed setpoint reached via the acceleration ramp exceeds the auto DCB thres-
hold C019), the motor will be energised and the drive will be "caught". Flying restart function
( 95)
 How to set the automatic DC-injection braking

1. Set a hold time in C106 > 0 s.
• Automatic DC-injection braking is active for the time set.
• In case of operation without speed feedback, the braking current set in C036 is injected
• After the set hold time has expired, the controller sets a pulse inhibit.
2. Set the operating threshold in C019.
• The operating threshold can serve to set a dead band in the setpoint. If DC-injection bra-
king is not to be active then, C106 must be set to a value of "0".

________________________________________________________________
Explanation of the automatic DC-injection braking function by means of an example
 The motor rotates at a specified

speed. The current adjusts itself to
0 the load, see .
C00019
 The DC braking current set in
C036 is injected.
1  After the hold time (C106) has
expired, a pulse inhibit is set.
2
C00036
C0107
 Speed setpoint
 Actual speed value of the motor
 Output current of the controller
 Pulse inhibit
 DC-injection braking is active
[5-4] Example 1: Signal characteristic for automatic DC-injection braking of a drive without speed feedback

________________________________________________________________
5.6.4 Slip compensation
Under load, the speed of an asynchronous machine decreases. This load-dependent speed drop is
called slip. The slip can partly be compensated for by the setting in C021.

Value Unit
C021 Slip compensation 0.00 %
• The setting of C021 can be done automatically in the course of motor parameter identification.
Automatic motor data identification ( 71)
• The setting must be made manually if the motor parameter identification cannot be called up.
 How to set the slip compensation manually:

1. Calculate the slip compensation according to motor nameplate data:
s Slip constant (C021) [%]
n rsyn – n r
s = ----------------------- ⋅ 100% nrsyn Synchronous motor speed [rpm]
n rsyn
nr Rated motor speed according to the motor
f r ⋅ 60 nameplate [rpm]
n rsyn = --------------
- fr Rated motor frequency according to the mo-
p
tor nameplate [Hz]
p Number of motor pole pairs (1, 2, 3 ...)
2. Transfer the calculated slip constant s in C021.

3. Correct the setting in C021 while the drive is running until the load-dependent speed drop
does not occur anymore between idling and maximum load of the motor in the desired
speed range.
 Tip!
The following guide value applies to a correctly set slip compensation:
• Deviation from the rated motor speed ≤ 1% for the speed range of 10 % ... 100 % of the
rated motor speed and loads ≤ rated motor torque.
• Greater deviations are possible in the field weakening range.
• C021 is set too high, the drive may get unstable.
.
• Negative slip (C021 < 0) with V/f characteristic control results in "smoother" drive beha-
viour at heavy load impulses or applications requiring a significant speed drop under
load.
________________________________________________________________
5.6.5 Oscillation damping
Mechanical oscillations are undesirable effects in every process and they may have an adverse effect
on the single system components and/or the production output.
Mechanical oscillations in the form of speed oscillations are suppressed by the oscillation damping
function.

Value Unit
C234 Oscillation damping influence 5.00 %
Oscillation damping is successfully used with

• unloaded motors (no-load oscillations)
• motors whose rated power deviates from the rated power of the controller.
• e.g. during operation at high switching frequency including the power derating involved.
• operation with higher-pole motors
• operation with special motors
• compensation of resonance in the drive
• At an output frequency of approx. 20 ... 40 Hz, some asynchronous motors can show reso-
nance which causes current and speed variations and thus destabilise the running operation.
 How to eliminate speed oscillations:

1. Approach the area where the speed oscillations occur.
2. Reduce the speed oscillations by changing C234 step by step.
3. These can be indicators for smooth running:
• Constant motor current characteristic
• Reduction of the mechanical oscillations in the bearing seat
5.7 Braking operation/braking energy management
________________________________________________________________
When electric motors are braked, the kinetic energy of the drive train is fed back into the DC circuit
regeneratively. This energy leads to an increase in the DC bus voltage. In order to avoid overvoltage
in the DC bus, several different strategies can be used:
• Use of an external brake resistor
• Use of an external brake module
(only for inverters with single phase supply)
• Coupling of the inverters in a DC-bus connection
(only for inverters with three-phase supply)
• Recovery of regenerative energy with a regenerative module
(only for inverters with three-phase supply)
 Stop!
If the connected brake resistor is smaller than required, the brake chopper can be de-
stroyed!
• For rated data see hardware manual.
• Appropriate protective measures are provided in the "Avoiding thermal overload of
the brake resistor" subchapter. ( 103)
 Note!
• We recommend to use the brake chopper (brake transistor) which is integrated into
the controller for the braking operation, regardless of the selected motor control.
• For a DC-bus connection with other devices, we recommend to connect the regenera-
tive power supply module to terminals +UG and –UG.
• If none of these measures is taken, e.g. the overvoltage deactivation ("OU") may re-
spond in case of low deceleration times during regenerative operation. Error
messages of the operating system ( 153)
 Observe the notes on braking operation in the hardware manual!

(see "braking operation" chapter).
All the necessary instructions for the drive controller are stored in electronic form on the
data carrier supplied with the 8400 drive controller.

Value Unit
C173 Mains voltage 3ph 400 V / 1ph 230 V

C174 Reduced brake chopper threshold 0 V
C574 Resp. to brake resist. overtemp. No response
________________________________________________________________
5.7.1 Setting the voltage source for braking operation
The voltage threshold for braking operation is set via the mains voltage (C173) and the reduced bra-
ke chopper threshold (C174. When this "brake chopper threshold" is exceeded in the DC bus, the en-
ergy is dissipated in the DC bus via the brake resistor and the DC-bus voltage is reduced.
• The brake chopper threshold is preset as follows so that it is higher than the specified mains
(C173):
Mains voltage Brake chopper threshold

C173 1-phase 3-phase 1-phase 3-phase
0 1ph 230V 3ph 400V 380V DC 725V DC
1 1ph 230V 3ph 440V 380V DC 35V DC
2 1ph 230V 3ph 480V 380V DC 775V DC
3 1ph 230V 3ph 500V 380V DC 790V DC
• This brake chopper threshold can be reduced by 0 ... 150 V via C174.
 Stop!
The brake chopper threshold resulting from C173 and C174 must not exceed the statio-
nary DC-bus voltage!
Example:
• A 400 V device has a maximum mains voltage of 420 V AC.
• Maximum stationary DC-bus voltage: 420 V AC * 1.414 = 594 V DC
• C173 has been set with the selection "0" for 400 V AC mains.
• This means that C174 can be set to a maximum of 131 V DC (725 V DC - 594 V DC).
5.7.2 Avoiding thermal overload of the brake resistor
• Parameterisation of an error response in C574 and evaluation of the parameterised error mes-
sage within the application or within the machine control system.
• See chapter entitled "Brake resistor monitoring (I2xt)". ( 107)
• External interconnection using the thermal contact on the brake resistor (e.g. supply interrupti-
on via the mains contactor and activation of the mechanical brakes).
5.8 Monitoring
________________________________________________________________
5.8 Monitoring
Many monitoring functions that are integrated into the controller can detect errors and thus protect
the device/motor from damage or overload.
• Detailed information on the individual monitoring functions can be found in the following sub-
chapters.
Monitoring Response Parameter

(Lenze setting)
Device overload monitoring (Ixt) Warning C604

Motor load monitoring (I2xt) Warning C606
Brake resistor monitoring (I2xt) No Reaction C574
Mains phase failure monitoring Warning C565
Parameterisable responses
If a monitoring function trips, the response set via the corresponding parameter is carried out. The
following responses can be selected:
• "No response": Response/monitoring is deactivated.
• "Fault": Change of the operating status by a pulse inhibit of the power output stage.
• "Warning": Operating status of the controller remains unchanged. Only a message is entered
into the logbook of the controller.
Related topics:
Device states ( 54)
Diagnostics & error management ( 142)
5.8.1 Device overload monitoring (Ixt)
In C064/1...3 displays the device utilisation (ixt) in [%] in different time intervals:
Parameter Info
C064/1 Device utilisation (Ixt)
• Maximum value of the pulse utilisation (C064/2)
and permanent utilisation (C064/3).
C064/2 Device utilisation (Ixt) 15s
• Pulse utilisation over the last 15 seconds (only for loads >160 %).
C064/3 Device utilisation (Ixt) 3 min
• Permanent utilisation over the last 3 minutes.
• If the device utilisation reaches the switch-off threshold set in C123:

• The error response set in C604 will be carried out (Lenze setting: "Warning").
• The "OC5: Ixt overload" error message will be entered into the logbook.
• A setting of C604 = "0: No Reaction" deactivates the monitoring.
5.8 Monitoring
________________________________________________________________
5.8.2 Motor load monitoring (I2xt)
The Inverter Drives 8400 are provided with a simple, sensorless, thermal I2xt motor monitoring of
self-ventilated standard motors which is based on a mathematical model.
• In C066 displays the calculated motor load in [%]..
• If the motor load reaches the switch-off threshold set in C120:
• The "OC6: I2xt motor overload" error message will be entered into the logbook.
• A setting of C606 = "0: No Reaction" deactivates the monitoring.
 Stop!
The I2xt motor monitoring does not present full motor protection! As the motor utilisa-
tion calculated in the thermal motor model is lost after mains switching, for instance the
following operating states cannot be measured correctly:
• Restarting (after mains switching) of a motor that is already very hot.
• Change of the cooling conditions (e.g. cooling air flow interrupted or too warm).
A full motor protection requires additional measures as e.g. the evaluation of tempera-
ture sensors that are located directly in the winding or the use of thermal contacts.
 Note!
From version 03.04.00, the thermal motor load displayed in C066 can be pre-initialised
when the device is connected to the mains, optionally using a fixed value or the value
used last at the time when the device was switched off. The desired initialisation is se-
lected in C122. In the Lenze setting of C122, the behaviour remains unchanged (no initi-
alisation).
Adjustment of the motor utilisation meter

The motor utilisation meter for indicating the motor load in C066 begins to count when the appa-
rent motor current (C054) is greater than the set overload threshold (C120).
The overload threshold (C120) is to be set as follows:
Ir : Rated motor current (see nameplate of motor)
Ir IN: Rated controller current at a switching frequency of f = 8 kHz
C00120 = ----- ⋅ 100%
IN
• If you reduce C120 starting from the calculated value, the motor utilisation meter will already
be counted up before the rated overload threshold is reached.
• If you reduce C120 starting from the calculated value, the motor utilisation meter will already
be counted up before the rated overload threshold is reached.
5.8 Monitoring
________________________________________________________________
Ir x 100 % Ir x 100 % Ir x 100 %

C00120 < C00120 = C00120 >
IN IN IN
t [s]
f = 20 Hz
360
f = 0 Hz f > 40 Hz
300
240
180
120
60
0
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 C00054
Ir
f: Output frequency
t: Release time
Irated: Rated controller current at a switching frequency of f = 8 kHz
Ir : Rated motor current (see nameplate of motor)
C054: Apparent motor current
C120: Motor overload threshold
[5-5] Tripping characteristic of the I2xt monitoring
Example:
C120 = Ir /Irated x 100 %
C054 = 150 % rated motor current
• After approx. 60 seconds, C066 has reached the final value100 % at output frequencies
f > 40 Hz.
• The controller outputs the "OC6: I2xt overload motor" error message and triggers the response
set in C606 (default setting: "Warning").
 Tip!
• If forced ventilated motors are used, a premature response of the overload threshold can
be avoided by deactivating this function if necessary (C606 = "0: No Reaction").
• The current limits set in C022 and C023 influence the I2xt calculation only in an indirect
way. However, the operation of the motor at maximum possible load can be averted.
Defining current and speed limits ( 77)
5.8 Monitoring
________________________________________________________________
5.8.3 Brake resistor monitoring (I2xt)
Due to the converted braking power, the brake resistor is thermally stressed and can even be ther-
mally destroyed by excessive braking power.
The monitoring of the I2xt utilisation of the controller serves to protect the brake resistor. It acts in
proportion to the converted braking power.
 Danger!
In the Lenze setting ((C574 = "0: No Reaction") the response of the monitoring function
does not stop the braking operation!
In particular for applications such as hoists or applications with a DC-bus connection, it
must be checked if a stopping of the braking operation due to the setting of C574 = "1:
Fault" is permissible.
 Stop!
Implement appropriate protective measures against thermal overload of the brake resis-
tor!
Examples:
• Parameterisation of an error response in C574 and evaluation of the parameterised
error message within the application or within the machine control system.
• Interruption of the mains supply by means of the temperature contact at the brake re-
sistor and a simultaneous activation of the mechanical brake.
• If the I2xt utilisation reaches a permanently set switch-off threshold:

• The error response set in C574 takes place.
• The "OC12: I2xt brake resistor overload" error message is entered into the logbook.
• If the system is dimensioned correctly, the monitoring mode should not respond.
• If the DC-bus voltage exceeds the overvoltage threshold due to a braking energy that is too high,
the monitoring for overvoltage in the DC bus is activated ("OU: DC-bus overvoltage" error mes-
sage).
Related topics:
Braking operation/braking energy management ( 102)
5.8 Monitoring
________________________________________________________________
5.8.4 Mains phase failure monitoring
 Stop!
Under load, the mains input of a three-phase controller can be destroyed if the device is
only supplied by two phases (e.g. if a mains phase fails).
The drive controller has a simple mains-phase failure detection function with which a mains phase
failure can be detected under load.
• In the case of power-adapted machines, approx. 50 % of the rated motor power must be excee-
ded so that a main-phase failure can be detected.
• If the mains phase failure monitoring is tripped:
• The "Su02: Mains voltage switched-off" error message is entered into the logbook.
6 I/O terminals
________________________________________________________________
6 I/O terminals
This chapter provides information on the function, possible parameter settings, and technical data
of the input/output terminals of the controller.
In the »Engineer«, the digital and analog input and output terminals are parameterised on the
Terminal assignment tab. To do this, go to the Control terminals list field and select the terminals
that you wish to parameterise:
You can find further information in the respective subchapter:

Digital terminals ( 110)
Analog terminals ( 112)
 Note!
The input and output terminals of the controlelr are already functionally assigned in the
default setting ("Lenze setting"). The preconfigured assignment depends on the control
mode selected in C007.
 Tip!
How you can alter the preconfigured assignment of the input and output terminals is de-
scribed in the chapter entitled "User-defined terminal assignment". ( 115)
6 I/O terminals
6.1 Digital terminals
________________________________________________________________
Digital input terminals

The drive controller has
• four parameterisable input terminals (DI1 ... DI4) for detecting digital signals.
• one RFR control input for controller enable.
Digital output terminals

The drive controller has
• a parameterisable output terminal (DO1) for outputting digital signals,
• a relay output (NO/COM).
 Note!
Initialisation behaviour:
• After mains switching up to the start of the application
• the digital output remains set to FALSE.
• the switching contact of the relay (NO/COM) remains open.
Exception handling:
• In the event of a critical exception in the application (e.g. reset), the digital output is
set to FALSE.
Switching cycle diagnostics of the relay:
• A reference for evaluating the wear limit can be obtained via the number of switching
cycles of the relay displayed in C177/2.
6 I/O terminals
________________________________________________________________
Button Function
Indicates the polarity of the input is HIGH active.
The polarity can be changed from HIGH active to LOW active by clicking on this button.
Indicates that the polarity of the input is LOW active.

The polarity can be changed from LOW active to HIGH active by clicking on this button.
Open the parameterising dialog for assigning application inputs to the digital input.
Changing the terminal assignment with the »Engineer« ( 117)
Short overview of parameters for the digital terminals:

Value Unit
Digital inputs DI1 ... DI5

C114 DIx: Polarity Bit coded
C443/1 DIx: Terminal level -
C443/2 DIx: Output level (to the application) -
Digital output DO1 / relay output
C118 DOx: Inversion Bit coded
C444/1 DOx: Input level (from the application) -
C444/2 DOx: Terminal level -
Digital outputs - terminal configuration
C621/1 LS_DigitalOutput:bRelay 50: LA_nCtrl_bDriveFail
C621/2 LS_DigitalOutput:bOut1 51: LA_nCtrl_bDriveReady
6 I/O terminals
6.2 Analog terminals
________________________________________________________________
The controller is provided with an analog input for detecting a voltage signal. The voltage signal can
be e.g. an analog speed setpoint selection or the signal of an external sensor (temperature, pressure,
etc.).
• Possible voltage ranges:
• 0 ... +10 V (Lenze setting)
• 0 ... +5 V
• 1 ... +5 V
• An external 250-Ω load resistor and a respective parameter setting allow to implement a cur-
rent loop:
• 0 ... 20 mA, without open-circuit monitoring
• 4 ... 20 mA, with open-circuit monitoring
 Note!
To avoid undefined states, free input terminals of the controller must be assigned as
well, e.g. by applying 0 V to the terminal.
Parameterisation dialog in the »Engineer«:
Button Function
Parameterising analog input ( 113)
Open the parameterising dialog for assigning application inputs to the analog input.
Changing the terminal assignment with the »Engineer« ( 117)
6 I/O terminals
________________________________________________________________
6.2.1 Parameterising analog input
By clicking on the Terminal assignment tab, you reach the parameterising dialog for the analog
input:
Short overview of parameters for the analog input:

Value Unit
C034/1 AIN1: Config. 0: 0 ... +10 V

C026/1 AIN1: Offset 0.0 %
C027/1 AIN1: Gain 100.0 %
C010/1 AIN1: Minimum analog setpoint 0.0 %
C028/1 AIN1: Input voltage - V
C033/1 AIN1: Output value (to application) - %
C598/1 Resp. to open circuit AIN1 1: Fault
Using the analog input as current input

In the Lenze setting, a voltage signal in the range 0 ... +10 V is evaluated via the analog input termi-
nal A1U.
For evaluating a current signal:
1. Connect external 250-Ω load resistor.
2. Make the following setting in C034/1:
• Selection "1: 0 ... +5 V" for 0 ... 20 mA current loop.
• Selection "2: +1 ... +5 V" for 4 ... 20 mA current loop
("life zero", with open-circuit monitoring).
3. With a configuration as 4 ... 20 mA current loop in C598/1, set the desired error response in the
event of open circuit (Lenze setting: "Fault").
6 I/O terminals
________________________________________________________________
Minimum and maximum output speed

The speed range required for the application results from the selected reference speed (C011) and
the minimum analog setpoint (C010):
• The reference speed set in C011 is reached at a speed setpoint selection of 100 %.
• All speed setpoint selections are provided in % and always refer to the reference speed set in
C011 (independent of the setpoint source).
• The speed set in C010 corresponds to the minimum speed if the speed setpoint has been selec-
ted via the analog input (Lenze setting) and a voltage of 0 V is applied to the X4/A1U input ter-
minal.
n
100 % = C00011
C00010
0V 10 V
[6-1] Relation between the selected setpoint and minimum and maximum output speed
6 I/O terminals
6.3 User-defined terminal assignment
________________________________________________________________
In order to individually adapt the preconfigured assignment of the input/output terminals to your
application, you can choose one of the following procedures:
A. In the »Engineer«:
• Change the terminal assignment on the Terminal assignment tab.
• Change the signal assignment on the Application Parameters tab, on the dialog level
Overview  Signal flow.
B. In the »Engineer« or with the keypad:
• Change the parameters for signal configuration in the parameters list.
 Note!
If you change the preconfigured assignment of the input/output terminals, the terminal
assignment will be a user-defined one. In C007, control mode "0: Interconnection chan-
ged" will be shown.
 Tip!
First set a suitable Lenze configuration by selecting a corresponding control mode in C007.
We recommend using the »Engineer« for the implementation of comprehensive user-defi-
ned drive solutions.
6 I/O terminals
________________________________________________________________
6.3.1 Source-destination principle
The I/O configuration of the input and output signals is carried out according to the source/desti-
nation principle:
• A connection always has a direction and therefore always has a source and a target.
• The input signals of the application are logically linked via configuration parameters to the out-
put signals of system blocks which represent the device input terminals.
• The inputs of system blocks that represent the device output terminals are logically to output
signals of the application via configuration parameters.
The following graphic illustrates the source/destination principle:
& &
& &
,QSXWSRUWV 2XWSXWSRUWV
$SSOLNDWLRQ

$SSOLFDWLRQ
$QWULHEVVFKQLWWVWHOOH
2XWSXWV
'LJLWDOLQSXWV 'LJLWDORXWSXWV
,QSXWV
,QSXWV
$QDORJLQSXWV
[6-2] Source-destination principle
Note the following:

• A device input terminal can be logically linked to several inputs of the application.
• Each input of the application can only be logically linked to one input signal.
• An output of the application can be logically linked to several device output terminals.
6 I/O terminals
________________________________________________________________
6.3.2 Changing the terminal assignment with the »Engineer«
The »Engineer« serves to easily change the preconfigured terminal assignment via corresponding
dialogs. The following task serves to describe the respective procedure.
Task: Based on the preset control mode "Terminals 0", the digital input DI2 is used for activating the
quick stop instead of selecting the fixed setpoint 2/3. For this purpose, the digital input DI2 must
not be linked to the bJogSpeed2 input but to the bSetQuickstop input of the application.
Possibility 1: Change terminal assignment by means of the Terminal Assignment tab

Procedure:
1. Select the "Digital terminals" entry on the Terminal assignment tab in the Control terminals list
field:
2. Click the button for the DI2 terminal in order to open the dialog box Assignment Terminal
--> Function block.
• In the list field, all block inputs that are currently logically linked to digital input DI2 are mar-
ked with a checkmark:
3. Remove checkmark for the connection LA_NCtrl: bJogSpeed2 in order to cancel the existing lo-
gical link.
4. Set checkmark for connection LA_NCtrl: bSetQuickstop in order to logically link this application
input to digital input DI2.
5. Click the OK button to clise the dialog box again.
6 I/O terminals
________________________________________________________________
Possibility 2: Change terminal assignment by means of the signal flow shown

Procedure:
1. Go to the Application parameters tab.
2. Go to the Application Parameters tab and click on the Signal flow button in order to change to
the dialog level Overview  Signal flow.
3. In the bJogSpeed2 list field, set the selection "0: Not interconnected".
4. In the bSetQuickstop list field, set the "12: DigIn_bIn2" selection.
6.3.3 Changing the terminal assignment via configuration parameters
The preconfigured terminal assignment can be reconfigured via a bus system, with the keypad or
with the »Engineer« by means of configuration parameters.
• Each configuration parameter represents a signal input of a function block, a system block or an
application block.
• Each configuration parameter contains a selection list with output signals of the same type of
data.
• Logical linking is thus carried out by selecting the output signal for the corresponding signal in-
put.
In the following example, digital output 1 (LS_DigitalOutput.bOut1 input) is logically linked to the
status signal "Drive ready" (LA_nCtrl_bDriveReady output signal):
 Tip!
An overview of all configuration parameters and their Lenze setting in the different control
modes is provided in the chapter "Pre-assignment of the drive application". ( 134)
6 I/O terminals
________________________________________________________________
Example
Task: Based on the preset control mode "Terminals 0", the digital input DI2 is used for activating the
quick stop instead of selecting the fixed setpoint 2/3. For this purpose, the digital input DI2 must
not be linked to the bJogSpeed2 input but to the bSetQuickstop input of the application.
Procedure:
1. Change the setting of the configuration parameter LA_NCtrl: bSetQuickstop (C701/3) which re-
presents the logical link of the bSetQuickstop application input: "0: Not connected"  "12:
DigIn_bIn2"
2. Change the setting of the configuration parameter LA_NCtrl: bJogSpeed2 (C701/7) which rep-
resents the logical link of the bJogSpeed2 application input: "12: DigIn_bIn2"  "0: Not connec-
ted"
/$B1&WUO
& E6HW4XLFNVWRS
QRWFRQQHFWHG
/6B'LJLWDO,QSXW 'LJ,QBE,Q
E,Q & E-RJ6SHHG

', 'LJ,QBE,Q
QRWFRQQHFWHG
[6-3] Example: Changing the terminal assignment via configuration parameters
 Tip!
The example shows, for each input of the application, the associated configuration para-
meter (C700/x or C701/x) is only allowed to contain one source that you enter.
Related topics:
6 I/O terminals
6.4 Electrical data
________________________________________________________________
6.4 Electrical data
X4 GND
A1U
AR RB = 250 W
12I
RFR
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4 X101 NO
24E
DO1 COM
Terminal Application / electrical data

GND Reference potential
A1U Voltage or current input
General data:
Resolution: 10 bits
(Error: 1 digit ≡ 0.1 %, in relation to the final value)
Conversion rate: 1 kHz
In order to filter short-time faults in the analog signal charac-
teristic, the analog input value is led via a digital lag filter
with a time constant of 5 ms.
Processing cycle: 1 kHz (1 ms)
Electric strength of external voltage: ±15 V, permanent
If used as voltage input:
Level/scaling: When C034/1 = "0":
0 ... +10 V ≡ 0 ... +214 ≡ 0 ... +16384 ≡ 0 ... +100 %
When C034/1 = "1" or "2":
0 ... +5 V ≡ 0 ... +214 ≡ 0 ... +16384 ≡ 0 ... +100 %
Input resistance: > 50 kΩ
Input voltage in case of open circuit: Display "0" (V< 0.2 V, absolute)
Accuracy: ±0.1 V
If used as current input (with external 250-Ω load resistor; see illustration):
Level/scaling: 0 ... +20 mA ≡ 0 ... +214 ≡ 0 ... +16384 ≡ 0 ... +100 %
Input resistance: 250 Ω (external)
AR 10-V reference voltage for analog input
maximum output current: 10 mA
12I 12 V voltage for connecting the digital inputs via potential-free contacts
• Internal supply: DC
maximum output current: 50 mA
Electric strength of external voltage: +30 V
Overcurrent protection: Automatic reset
RFR Controller enable
• Electrical data as in digital inputs
6 I/O terminals
6.4 Electrical data
________________________________________________________________
Terminal Application / electrical data

DI1 ... DI4 Digital inputs (according to IEC 61131-2, type 1)
LOW level: 0 ... +2.5 V
HIGH level: +10 ... +30 V
Input current: 4 mA per input (at 12 V supply of terminal 12I)
Electric strength of external voltage: ±30 V, permanent
Input impedance: 3.3 kΩ (2.0 kΩ ... 5.0 kΩ)
24E External 24-V voltage supply
Input voltage: 24 V according to IEC 61131-2
DC 15.0 ... 30.0 V
Max. residual ripple ±5 %
SELV/PELV
Polarity reversal protection: In case of polarity reversal, the internal 12-V supply is active;
no destruction.
Current consumption: ≈ 50 mA during operation
DO1 Digital output (according to IEC 61131-2, type 1
LOW level: 0 ... +5 V
HIGH level: +15 ... +30 V
(independent of voltage at X4/24E)
Output current: max. 50 mA
(external resistance > 480 Ω at 24 V)
Electric strength of external voltage: +30 V
Integrated polarity reversal protection diode for switching
inductive loads
Behaviour in case of overload: Reduced voltage or periodical connection/disconnection
NO / COM Relay output
• Potential-free contact (NO contact)
• AC 250 V / 3 A
• DC 24 V / 2 A ... 240 V / 0.22 A (with suppressor circuit)
Important: The minimum load must not fall below 12 V and 5 mA.
7 Drive application
________________________________________________________________
7 Drive application
The "actuating drive speed" application provided in the 8400 BaseLine D controller is a drive soluti-
on equipped with Lenze's experience and know-how in which function and system blocks intercon-
nected to a signal flow clearly show the basis for implementing typical drive tasks.
The application serves to solve speed-controlled drive tasks, e.g. conveyor drives (interconnected),
extruders, test benches, vibrators, travelling drives, presses, machining tools, dosing systems.
Brief description of the features

• Pre-configured control modes for terminals and bus control (with predefined process data con-
nection to the fieldbus)
• Free configuration of input and output signals
• Offset and gain of the main setpoint (if defined via analog input)
• Up to 3 fixed setpoints for speed
• Adjustable setpoint ramp times
• Linear or S-shaped ramp
• Quick stop (QSP) with adjustable ramp time
• Connectable motor potentiometer function (as alternative setpoint source)
• Connectable process controller (PID controller) with various operating modes
• Load monitoring
Input/output interface
The application features an input interface for the connection of the signal sources (e.g. main set-
point) as well as an output interface for the control of output terminals and output ports.
Parameter
The setting/parameterisation of internal functions, the selection of setpoints and the display of ac-
tual values is executed via parameters. A re-configuration of the interfaces is also possible via the
corresponding configuration parameters.
Related topics:
Introduction: Parameterising the controller ( 13)
Commissioning with integrated keypad ( 28)
Commissioning with the »Engineer« ( 32)
7 Drive application
7.1 Parameterisation dialog
________________________________________________________________
Go to the Application parameter tab to change the most important settings for the application in
the top dialog level Overview :

Value Unit
Control mode 10: Terminals 0 Various control modes can be selected for the applicati-
(C007) on. The selection of the control mode determines the
way the application is controlled, e.g. via terminals or
via a fieldbus.
• The preconfigured assignment of the input/output
terminals and ports in the respective control mode is
described in the chapter entitled "Terminal
assignment of the control modes". ( 137)
• Detailed information on the individual configuration
of the input/output terminals can be found in the de-
scription of the I/O terminals in the subchapter
"User-defined terminal assignment". ( 115)
L_PCTRL_1: Operating mode 0: Off A process controller (PID controller) is connected
(C242) downstream of the setpoint generator.
• In the Lenze setting, the process controller is deacti-
vated.
• The activation is executed by selecting the operating
mode in C242.
• For a detailed functional description see
FB L_PCTRL_1. ( 233)
7 Drive application
________________________________________________________________

Value Unit
L_MPot_1: Use 0: No Alternatively, the main speed setpoint can be generated

(C806) via a motor potentiometer function.
• In the Lenze setting, the motor potentiometer func-
tion is deactivated.
• Activation is possible via C806 or via the
bMPotEnable input.
• The behaviour of the motor potentiometer during
switch-on of the drive system can be selected in
C805.
• For a detailed functional description see
FB L_MPot_1. ( 226)
Accel. time - main setpoint 2.0 s The setpoint is led via a ramp function generator with li-
(C012) near characteristic. The ramp function generator con-
Decel. time - main setpoint 2.0 s verts setpoint step-changes at the input into a ramp.
(C013) • For a detailed functional description see
FB L_NSet_1. ( 230)
Reference speed 1500 rpm All speed setpoint selections are provided in % and al-
(C011) ways refer to the reference speed set in C011.
plate.
Deceleration time - quick 5.0 s When "quick stop" is requested, the motor control is de-
stop coupled from the setpoint selection and within the de-
(C105) celeration time parameterised in C105, the motor is
brought to a standstill in (nact = 0).
Activate/Deactivate quick stop ( 51)
Fixed setpoint 1 40.0 % A fixed setpoint for the setpoint generator can be acti-
(C039/1) vated instead of the main setpoint via the selection in-
Fixed setpoint 2 60.0 % puts bJogSpeed1 and bJogSpeed2.
(C039/2) • The fixed setpoints are selected in [%] based on the
reference speed (C011).
Fixed setpoint 3 80.0 % • For a detailed functional description see
(C039/3)
FB L_NSet_1. ( 230)
 Tip!
When you click the Signal flow button, you will get one dialog level down to the signal flow
of the application.
7 Drive application
________________________________________________________________
7.1.1 Signal flow
When you go to the Application parameters tab to the top dialog level Overview and click the Signal
flow button, you will get one dialog level down to the signal flow of the application (here displayed
with the preset control mode "Terminals 0"):
 Motor potentiometer (L_MPot_1)  Device control (LS_DriveInterface)

 Setpoint generator (L_NSet_1)  Motor control (MCTRL)
 Process controller (L_PCTRL_1)
 All input and output interfaces of the application are described in the chapter entitled
"Interface description". ( 128)
Configuration parameters for digital control signals:
Parameter Selection of signal source for control signal:

(Lenze setting)
bMPotUp 0: Not connected L_MPot_1: Increase speed setpoint

(C701/8)
bMPotDown 0: Not connected L_MPot_1: Decrease speed setpoint

(C701/9)
bMPotInAct 0: Not connected L_MPot_1: Activate inactive function

(C701/10)
bMPotEnable 0: Not connected L_MPot_1: Activate motor potentiometer function

(C701/11)
bRLQCw 1: C_bTrue Activate clockwise rotation (fail-safe)

(C701/17)
7 Drive application
________________________________________________________________
Parameter Selection of signal source for control signal:

(Lenze setting)
bRLQCcw 0: Not connected Activate counter-clockwise rotation (fail-safe)

(C701/18)
bSetSpeedCcw 14: DigIn_bIn4 Change of direction of rotation

(C701/5) (DI4)
bJogSpeed1 11: DigIn_bIn1 Selection of fixed setpoints (JOG setpoints)
(C701/6) (DI1)
bJogSpeed2 12: DigIn_bIn2
(C701/7) (DI2)
bPIDEnableInfluenceRamp 1: C_bTrue L_PCTRL_1: Activate ramp for influencing factor
(C701/15)
bPIDOff 0: Not connected L_PCTRL_1: Switch off I component

(C701/16)
bCInh 1: C_bTrue Enable/Inhibit controller

(C701/1)
bFailReset 15: DigIn_CInh Reset of error message

(C701/2) (RFR)
bSetQuickstop 0: Not connected Enable quick stop (QSP)
(C701/3)
bSetDCBrake 13: DigIn_bIn3 Manual DC-injection braking (DCB)

(C701/3) (DI3)
Configuration parameters for analog setpoints:
Parameter Selection of signal source for setpoint selection:

(Lenze setting)
nMainSetValue_a 10: AIn1_Out Main setpoint

(C700/1) (Analog input 1) • 100 % ≡ reference speed (C011)
nPIDSetValue_a 0: Not connected L_PCTRL_1: Sensor setpoint or process setpoint for ope-
(C700/9) rating mode 2
nPIDVpAdapt_a 1: C_nPos100_a L_PCTRL_1: Adaptation of the gain Vp set in C222 in per-
(C700/6) (100%) cent
nPIDActValue_a 0: Not connected L_PCTRL_1: Actual speed value or actual sensor value
(C700/7) (actual process value)
nPIDInfluence_a 1: C_nPos100_a L_PCTRL_1: Limitation of the influencing factor in per-
(C700/8) (100%) cent
Display parameter
Parameter Info
nIn_a Input value of motor potentiometer
(C830/11)
nNSet_a Input value of setpoint generator

(C830/1)
nOut_a Output value of setpoint generator

(C830/2)
nSpeedSetValue_a Speed setpoint for motor control

(C830/2)
nSet_a Sensor setpoint or process setpoint for operating mode 2

(C830/8)
nAdapt_a Adaptation of the gain Vp set in C222 in percent

(C830/7)
nAct_a Speed or actual sensor value (actual process value)

(C830/6)
7 Drive application
________________________________________________________________
Parameter Info
nInflu_a Limitation of the influencing factor in percent
(C830/9)
Speed setpoint Speed setpoint

(C050)
7.1.1.1 Selection of the main speed setpoint

The main speed setpoint is selected in the Lenze setting via the analog input 1.
• Scaling: 10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed (C011)
• The main setpoint is transformed to a speed setpoint in the setpoint encoder via a ramp func-
tion generator with linear or S-shaped ramps.
• For a detailed functional description see FB L_NSet_1. ( 230)
Related topics:
Parameterising analog input ( 113)
7.1.1.2 Motor potentiometer function

Alternatively, the main speed setpoint can be generated via a motor potentiometer function.
• In the Lenze setting, the motor potentiometer function is deactivated.
• Activation is possible via C806 or via the bMPotEnable input.
• The behaviour of the motor potentiometer during switch-on of the drive system can be selected
in C805.
• For a detailed functional description see FB L_MPot_1. ( 226)
7.1.1.3 Process controller

A process controller (PID controller) is connected downstream of the setpoint generator.
• In the Lenze setting, the process controller is deactivated.
• The activation is executed by selecting the operating mode in C242.
• For a detailed functional description see FB L_PCTRL_1. ( 233)
7 Drive application
7.2 Interface description
________________________________________________________________
 Tip!
You can change the preconfigured assignment of the respective input via the configuration
parameters given in the first column.
User-defined terminal assignment ( 115)
Inputs

Data type
Configuration parameters
nMainSetValue_a Main speed setpoint

INT • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % reference speed (C011)
C700/1
• The main setpoint is transformed to a speed setpoint in the setpoint encoder via
a ramp function generator with linear or S-shaped ramps.
• Upstream to the ramp function generator, a blocking speed masking function
and a setpoint MinMax limitation are effective.
• For a detailed functional description see FB L_NSet.
nTorqueMotLim_a Torque limitation in motor mode and in generator mode
nTorqueGenLim_a • These input signals are directly transferred to the motor control to limit the con-
INT troller's maximum torque in motor and generator mode.
C700/2...3
• The drive cannot output a higher torque in motor/generator mode than set here.
• The applied values (any polarity) are internally interpreted as absolute values.
• If sensorless vector control (SLVC) is selected, the limitation has a direct effect on
the torque-producing current component.
• Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % Mmax (C057)
Torque limits in motor and generator mode:
TorqueGenLim M
TorqueMotLim
MN
-nN nN n
-MN
TorqueMotLim
TorqueGenLim
Device control
bCInh Enable/Inhibit controller
BOOL
C701/1 FALSE Enable controller: The controller switches to the "OperationEnabled"
device state, if no other source of a controller inhibit is active.
• C158 provides a bit coded representation of all active sources/
triggers of a controller inhibit..
TRUE Inhibit controller (controller inhibit): The controller switches to the
"SwitchedON" device state.
bFailReset Reset of error message
BOOL In the Lenze setting this input is connected to the digital input controller enable so
C701/2
that a possibly existing error message is reset together with the controller enable (if
the cause for the fault is eliminated).
TRUE The current fault is reset, if the cause for the fault is eliminated.
• If the fault still exists, the error status remains unchanged.
7 Drive application
________________________________________________________________

Data type
bSetQuickstop Enable quick stop (QSP)

BOOL • Also see device command "Activate/Deactivate quick stop".
C701/3
TRUE Activate quick stop
• The motor control is decoupled from the setpoint selection and
within the deceleration time parameterised in C105 the motor is
brought to a standstill (nist = 0).
• The motor is kept at a standstill during closed-loop operation.
• A pulse inhibit (CINH) is set if the "Auto-DCB" function has been
activated via C019.
FALSE Deactivate quick stop
• The quick stop is deactivated if no other source for the quick stop
is active.
• C159 provides a bit coded representation of all active sources/
triggers of a quick stop..
bSetDCBrake Manual DC-injection braking (DCB)
BOOL • Detailed information on DC-injection braking is provided in the motor control,
C701/4
subchapter "DC-injection braking".
 Note!
Holding braking is not possible when this braking mode is used!
FALSE Deactivate DC-injection braking.
TRUE Activate DC-injection braking, i.e. the drive is brought to a standstill
by means of DC-injection braking.
• The braking effect stops when the rotor is at standstill.
• After the hold time (C107) has expired, the controller sets the pul-
se inhibit (CINH).
Fail-safe selection of the direction of rotation in connection with quick stop
• In control mode "Terminals 16", both inputs are connected to the digital terminals DI3 and DI4.
• For a detailed functional description see FB L_RLQ.
bRLQCw Activate clockwise rotation (fail-safe)
BOOL
C701/17 FALSE Quick stop
TRUE Clockwise rotation
bRLQCcw Activate counter-clockwise rotation (fail-safe)
BOOL
C701/18 FALSE Quick stop
TRUE Counter-clockwise rotation
7 Drive application
________________________________________________________________

Data type
Setpoint generator
bSetSpeedCcw Change of direction of rotation
BOOL • For instance if a motor or gearbox is fixed laterally reversed to a machine part, but
C701/5
the setpoint selection should still be executed for the positive direction of rotati-
on.
FALSE Clockwise rotation (Cw)
TRUE Counter-clockwise rotation (Ccw)
bJogSpeed1 Selection inputs for fixed changeover setpoints (JOG setpoints) for the main setpoint
bJogSpeed2 • A fixed setpoint for the setpoint generator can be activated instead of the main
BOOL setpoint via these selection inputs.
C701/6
C701/7
• The two selection inputs are binary coded, therefore you can select three fixed
setpoints.
• In the case of binary coded selection "0" (all inputs = FALSE or not assigned), main
setpoint nMainSetValue_a is active.
• The fixed setpoints are selected in C039/1...3 in [%] based on the reference speed
(C011).
bRFG_0 Ramp function generator: Lead the main setpoint integrator to "0" within the cur-
BOOL rent Ti times
C701/12
TRUE The current value of the main setpoint integrator is led to "0" within
the Ti time set.
Motor potentiometer
Alternatively to the input signal nMainSetValue_a, the main setpoint can also be generated by a motor potentiome-
ter function.
• In the Lenze setting, the motor potentiometer function is deactivated.
• Activation is possible via C806 or via the bMPotEnable input.
• The behaviour of the motor potentiometer during switch-on of the drive system can be selected in C805.
• For a detailed functional description see FB L_MPot.
bMPotUp Increasing the speed setpoint
BOOL
C701/8 TRUE Approach the upper speed value set in C800 with the acceleration
time set in C802.
bMPotDown Decreasing the speed setpoint
BOOL
C701/9 TRUE Approach the lower speed limit value set in C801 with the decelera-
tion time set in C803.
bMPotInAct Activating the inactive function
BOOL
C701/10 TRUE The speed setpoint behaves according to the inactive function set in
C804.
• In the Lenze setting, the speed setpoint is maintained.
bMPotEnable Activating the motor potentiometer function
BOOL • This input and C806 are OR'd.
C701/11
TRUE The motor potentiometer function is active; the speed setpoint can
be changed via the bMPotUp and bMPotDown control inputs.
7 Drive application
________________________________________________________________

Data type
Process controller
• In the Lenze setting, the process controller is deactivated.
• The activation is executed by selecting the operating mode in C242.
• For a detailed functional description see FB L_PCTRL.
bPIDEnableInfluenceRamp Activate ramp for influencing factor
BOOL
C701/15 FALSE Influencing factor of the PID controller is ramped down to "0".
TRUE Influencing factor of the PID controller is ramped up to the value
nPIDInfluence_a.
bPIDOff Switch off I-component of the process controller
BOOL • In conjunction with the operating mode set in C242 (Lenze setting: "Off").
C701/16
TRUE I-component of the process controller is switched off.
nPIDVpAdapt_a Adaptation of the gain Vp set in C222 in percent
INT • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 %
C700/6
• Internal limitation to ±199.9 %
• Changes can be done online.
nPIDActValue_a Speed or actual sensor value (actual process value)
INT • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 %
C700/7
nPIDInfluence_a Limitation of the influencing factor in percent
INT • The influence factor of the PID controller can be limited to a certain value (-
C700/8
199.9% ... +199.9%) via nPIDInfluence_a.
• Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 %
nPIDSetValue_a Sensor setpoint or process setpoint for operating mode 2
INT • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 %
C700/9
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Device control
wDeviceStateWord Status word of the controller (based on DSP-402)
WORD • Display parameter: C150
wDeviceAuxStateWord Extended status word of the controller

WORD
wDetermFailNoLow Display of the current error (Low-Word)

WORD
wDetermFailNoHigh Display of the current error (High-Word)

WORD
bDriveFail TRUE Controller in error status

BOOL • "Fault" device state is active.
bDriveReady TRUE Controller is ready for operation.
BOOL • "SwitchedON" device state is active.
• The drive is in this device state if the DC bus voltage is applied and
the controller is still inhibited by the user (controller inhibit).
bCInhActive TRUE Controller inhibit is active
BOOL
bQSPIsActive TRUE Quick stop is active

BOOL
bSafeTorqueOff TRUE "SafeTorqueOff" device state is active

BOOL
7 Drive application
________________________________________________________________
Data type
bSafetyIsActive TRUE In preparation

BOOL
bSpeedCcw FALSE Clockwise rotation (Cw)

BOOL
bActSpeedEqZero TRUE Current speed is 0
BOOL
bSpeedSetReached TRUE Speed setpoint reached

BOOL
bSpeedActEqSet TRUE Actual speed value has reached the setpoint within one hysteresis
BOOL band
bNactCompare TRUE During open-loop operation:
BOOL Speed setpoint < comparison value (C024)
During closed-loop operation:
Actual speed value < comparison value (C024)
bImaxActive TRUE The current setpoint is limited internally
BOOL (the controller operates at the maximum current limit)
Motor control
bHeatSinkWarning TRUE Heatsink overtemperature detected
BOOL
bOVDetected TRUE Overvoltage detected

BOOL
bDcBrakeOn TRUE DC-injection braking active

BOOL
bFlyingSyncActive TRUE Flying restart function is executed

BOOL
nMotorFreqAct_a Current field frequency

C058 | INT
nOutputSpeedCtrl_a Speed or slip controller output

INT • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % reference speed (C011)
nMotorSpeedAct_a Actual speed value
C051 | INT • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % reference speed (C011)
nMotorVoltage_a Current motor voltage/inverter output voltage
INT • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 1000 V
nDCVoltage_a Actual DC-bus voltage
INT • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 1000 V
nMotorCurrent_a Current motor current
INT • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % Imax_mot (C022)
nMotorTorqueAct_a Actual torque
C056/2 | INT • With "VFC (+encoder)" motor control, this value is determined from the current
motor current and corresponds to the actual torque only by approximation.
• Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % Mmax (C057)
nHeatsinktemperature_a Heatsink temperature
INT
7 Drive application
7.3 Setting parameters (short overview)
________________________________________________________________

Value Unit
C012 Accel. time - main setpoint 2.0 s

C013 Decel. time - main setpoint 2.0 s
C182 S-ramp time PT1 20.00 s
C134 Ramp smoothing - main setpoint 0: Off
C019 Auto-DCB: Threshold 3 rpm
C036 DCB: Current 50.0 %
C039/1 Fixed setpoint 1 40.0 %
C105 Deceleration time - quick stop 5.0 s
C106 Auto-DCB: Hold time 0.5 s
C107 DCB: Hold time 999.0 s
C222 L_PCTRL_1: Vp 1.0
C223 L_PCTRL_1: Tn 400 ms
C224 L_PCTRL_1: Kd 0.0
C225 L_PCTRL_1: MaxLimit 199.9 %
C226 L_PCTRL_1: MinLimit -199.9 %
C227 L_PCTRL_1: Acceleration time 0.1 s
C228 L_PCTRL_1: Deceleration time 0.1 s
C231/1 L_PCTRL_1: Pos. maximum 199.9 %
C231/2 L_PCTRL_1: Pos. minimum 0.0 %
C231/3 L_PCTRL_1: Neg. minimum 0.0 %
C231/4 L_PCTRL_1: Neg. maximum 199.9 %
C242 L_PCTRL_1: Operating mode 0: Off
C243 L_PCTRL_1: Acceleration time influence 5.0 s
C244 L_PCTRL_1: Deceleration time influence 5.0 s
C245 L_PCTRL_1: PID output value - %
C800 L_MPot_1: Upper limit 100.0 %
C801 L_MPot_1: Lower limit -100.0 %
C802 L_MPot_1: Acceleration time 10.0 s
C803 L_MPot_1: Deceleration time 10.0 s
C804 L_MPot_1: Inactive function 0: Retain value
C805 L_MPot_1: Init function 0: Load last value
C806 L_MPot_1: Use 0: No
7.4 Pre-assignment of the drive application
134
________________________________________________________________
7.3
7
7.4.1 Input connections
Setting parameters (short overview)

Drive application
Configuration pa- Identifier Control mode
rameters
10 (terminals 0) 12 (Terminal 2) 14 (terminals 11) 16 (terminals 16) 20 (keypad) 21 (PC)
C700/1 nMainSetValue_a X4/A1U X4/A1U X4/A1U X4/A1U C728/3 C472/1
C700/2 nTorqueMotLim_a C472/3 C472/3 C472/3 C472/3 C728/1 C472/3
C700/3 nTorqueGenLim_a C472/3 C472/3 C472/3 C472/3 C728/2 C472/3
C700/6 nPIDVpAdapt_a 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 %
C700/7 nPIDActValue_a - - - - - -
C700/8 nPIDInfluence_a 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 %
C700/9 nPIDSetValue_a - - - - - -
C701/1 bCInh - - - - - -
C701/2 bFailReset X4/RFR X4/RFR X4/RFR X4/RFR X4/RFR X4/RFR
C701/3 bSetQuickstop - X4/DI3 - - C727/1 -
C701/4 bSetDCBrake X4/DI3 - X4/DI2 - C727/2 C470/3
C701/5 bSetSpeedCcw X4/DI4 X4/DI4 X4/DI1 - C727/3 C470/4
C701/6 bJogSpeed1 X4/DI1 X4/DI1 - X4/DI1 C727/4 C470/1
C701/7 bJogSpeed2 X4/DI2 X4/DI2 - X4/DI2 C727/5 C470/2

C701/8 bMPotUp - - X4/DI3 - - -
C701/9 bMPotDown - - X4/DI4 - - -
C701/10 bMPotInAct - - - - - -
C701/11 bMPotEnable - - TRUE - - -
C701/12 bRFG_0 - - - - - -
C701/13 bSetError1 - - - - - -
C701/14 bSetError2 - - - - - -
C701/15 bPIDInfluenceRamp TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE
C701/16 bPIDIOff - - - - - -
C701/17 bRLQCw TRUE TRUE TRUE X4/DI3 TRUE TRUE
C701/18 bRLQCcw - - - X4/DI4 - -
7.4.2 Output connections
________________________________________________________________
7.3
7
Configuration pa- Identifier Control mode
rameters
10 (terminals 0) 12 (Terminal 2) 14 (terminals 11) 16 (terminals 16) 20 (keypad) 21 (PC)

Drive application
C620/5 LS_DisFree: wDis1 (C481/1) - - - - wDeviceStateWord
C620/6 LS_DisFree: wDis2 (C481/2) - - - - - -
C620/9 LS_DisFree_a: nDis1_a (C482/1) - - - - nMotorSpeedAct_a
C620/10 LS_DisFree_a: nDis2_a (C482/2) - - - - nOutputSpeedCtrl_a
C620/11 LS_DisFree_a: nDis3_a (C482/3) - - - - - -
C620/12 LS_DisFree_a: nDis4_a (C482/4) - - - - - -
C621/1 LS_DigitalOutput:bRelay (X101) bDriveFail bDriveFail
C621/2 LS_DigitalOutput:bOut1 (X4/DO1) bDriveReady bDriveReady
C621/6 USER-LED bNactCompare bNactCompare
C621/7 LA_NCtrl: bStatusBit0 - - - - - -
C621/8 LA_NCtrl: bStatusBit2 bImaxActive bImaxActive
C621/9 LA_NCtrl: bStatusBit3 bSpeedSetReached bSpeedSetReached
C621/10 LA_NCtrl: bStatusBit4 bSpeedActEqSet bSpeedActEqSet
C621/11 LA_NCtrl: bStatusBit5 bNactCompare bNactCompare
C621/12 LA_NCtrl: bStatusBit14 bSpeedCcw bSpeedCcw
C621/13 LA_NCtrl: bStatusBit15 bDriveReady bDriveReady
C621/16 LS_DisFree_b: bDis1 (C480/Bit0) - - - - bDriveReady
C621/17 LS_DisFree_b: bDis2 (C480/Bit1) - - - - bDriveFail
C621/18 LS_DisFree_b: bDis3 (C480/Bit2) - - - - - -
... ...
C621/23 LS_DisFree_b: bDis8 (C480/Bit7)
135
7.4.3 Internal signal flow for control via terminals
136
________________________________________________________________
7.3
7
LA_NCtrl
LS_AnalogInput

Drive application
AIn_bCurrentErrorIn1 L_MPot
AIn1_Out nMainSetValue_a nln_a nOut_a
C700/1
bMPotUp bUp
C701/8
bMPotDown bDown
C701/9
LS_ParFree_a bMPotInAct LS_DisFree_a
C701/10 bEnable
C472/1 nPar1_a bMPotEnable C620/9 nDis1_a C482/1
C701/11 bInAct
C472/2 nPar2_a C620/10 nDis2_a C482/2
C472/3 nPar3_a C620/11 nDis3_a C482/3
C472/4 nPar4_a C620/12 nDis4_a C482/4
L_NSet
nNSet_a nNOut_a
LS_ParFree_b bJogSpeed1 bJog1
C701/6 LS_DisFree_b
bPar1 bJogSpeed2 bJog2
C470/1 C701/7 C621/16 bDis1
bPar2 bRFG_0 bRfg0
C470/2 C701/12 C621/17 bDis2
C470/... bPar... bNSetInv C621/18 bDis3
C470/16 bPar16 C621/19 bDis4
C480
C621/20 bDis5
L_PCTRL C621/21 bDis6
LS_ParFix nNSet_a nOut_a C621/22 bDis7
C_bTrue nPIDVpAdapt_a nAdapt_a bActEqSet
C700/6 C621/23 bDis8
C_nPos100_a nPIDActValue_a nAct_a nPIDOut_a
C700/7
C_nNeg100_a nPIDInfluence_a nInflu_a
C700/8
C_nPos199_9_a nPIDSetValue_a nSet_a LS_DisFree
C700/9
C_nNeg199_9_a bPIDInfluenceRamp bEnableInfluenceRamp C620/5 wDis1 C481/1
C701/15
C_w65535 bPIDIOff bIOff C620/6 wDis2 C481/2
C701/16
C_wDriveCtrl C620/7 wDis3 C481/3
C620/8 wDis4 C481/4
LS_MotorInterface
nSpeedSetValue_a bHeatSinkWarning bHeatSinkWarning
LS_DigitalInput nTorqueMotLim_a nTorqueMotLim_a bOVDetected bOVDetected LS_DigitalOutput
C700/2
bIn1 nTorqueGenLim_a nTorqueGenLim_a bDCBrakeOn bDCBrakeOn C621/1 bRelay
C700/3
bIn2 bFlyingSyncActive bFlyingSyncActive C621/2 bOut1
bIn3 bSetDCBrake bSetDCBrake nMotorCurrent_a

C701/4 nMotorCurrent_a
bIn4 bSetQuickstop nOutputSpeedCtrl_a nOutputSpeedCtrl_a
C701/3
bCInh 1 bSetQuickstop nMotorSpeedAct_a nMotorSpeedAct_a
bRLQCw
C701/17 nMotorTorqueAct_a
nMotorTorqueAct_a
RLQ nDCVoltage_a nDCVoltage_a
bRLQCcw nMotorVoltage_a
C701/18 nMotorVoltage_a
1 nMotorFreqAct_a
bSetSpeedCcw nMotorFreqAct_a
C701/5
nHeatsinkTemperature_a nHeatsinkTemperature_a
LS_DriveInterface
wDeviceStateWord wDeviceStateWord
wDeviceAuxStateWord wDeviceAuxStateWord
bCInh bCInh bReady bDriveReady
C701/1
bFailReset bFailReset bFail bDriveFail
C701/2
LS_Keypad bSetError1 bSetError1 bSafeTorqueOff bSafeTorqueOff
C701/13
C727/1 bSetQuickstop bSetError2 bSetError2 bSafetyIsActive bSafetyIsActive
C701/14
C727/2 bSetDCBrake bStatus_Bit0 bStatus_Bit0 bCInhIsActive bCInhActive
C621/7
C727/3 bSetSpeedCcw bImaxActive bStatus_Bit2 bStatus_Bit2 bCwCcw bSpeedCcw
C621/8
C727/4 bJogSpeed1 bSpeedSetReached bStatus_Bit3 bStatus_Bit3 bActSpeedEqZero bActSpeedEqZero
C621/9
C727/5 bJogSpeed2 bSpeedActEqSet bStatus_Bit4 bStatus_Bit4 bQSPIsActive bQSPIsActive
C621/10 C621/6
C728/1 nTorqueMotLimit_a bNActCompare bStatus_Bit5 bStatus_Bit5 bNActCompare bNActCompare
C621/11
USER-LED
C728/2 nTorqueGenLimit_a
C728/3 nMainSetValue_a
bSpeedCcw
bDriveReady
C621/12
bStatus_Bit14
bStatus_Bit15
bStatus_Bit14 bImaxActive bImaxActive
bSpeedSetReached
C
C621/13 bStatus_Bit15 bSpeedSetReached
8888
bSpeedActEqSet
bSpeedActEqSet
wDetermFailNoLow wDetermFailNoLow A D
wDetermFailNoHigh wDetermFailNoHigh B E
F
[7-1] Interconnection of the internal interfaces in the Lenze setting (control mode "terminals 0")
7.5 Terminal assignment of the control modes
________________________________________________________________
7.3
7
The following table shows which functions are assigned to the digital terminals in the different control modes.
Analog input Assignment of the digital terminals Relay output

Drive application
Control mode A1U DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DO1 NO / COM
Terminals 0 Setpoint selection JOG 1/3 JOG 2/3 DCB Cw/Ccw Status Status
10 V ≡ 100 % refe- "Drive is ready to "An error occurred"
Terminals 2 JOG 1/3 JOG 2/3 QSP Cw/Ccw
rence speed (C011) start"
Terminals 11 Cw/Ccw DCB MPotUp MPotDown
Terminals 16 JOG 1/3 JOG 2/3 Cw/QSP Ccw/QSP
Keypad - - - - -
PC - - - - -
Abbreviations used:
JOG Selection of the fixed setpoints 1 ... 3 in C039/1...3
DCB Manual DC-injection braking
Cw/Ccw CW/CCW rotation
QSP Quick stop
MPotUp Motor potentiometer: Increase speed
MPotDown Motor potentiometer: Decrease speed
Cw/QSP Fail-safe selection of the direction of rotation in connection with quick stop
Ccw/QSP
Related topics:
137
7 Drive application
________________________________________________________________
7.5.1 Terminals 0
X4
GND
Speed setpoint A1U
AR
12I
Enable controller / reset error message RFR
Selection of fixed setpoint 1/3 DI1
Manual DC-injection braking (DCB) DI3
Direction of rotation CCw DI4
+
External supply 24 V DC 24E
DO1 DriveReady
X101
NO
COM
DriveFail
Connection Assignment Connection Assignment

RFR LA_NCtrl.bFailReset A1U LA_NCtrl.nMainSetValue_a
10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed (C011)
DI1 LA_NCtrl.bJogSpeed1
DI3 LA_NCtrl.bSetDCBrake NO, COM LA_NCtrl.bDriveFail
DI4 LA_NCtrl.bSetSpeedCcw DO1 LA_NCtrl.bDriveReady
7.5.2 Terminals 2
X4
GND
Speed setpoint A1U
AR
12I
Quick stop DI3
+
DO1 DriveReady
X101
NO
COM
DriveFail

DI3 LA_NCtrl.bSetQuickstop NO, COM LA_NCtrl.bDriveFail
DI5 LA_NCtrl.bBrkRelease DO1 LA_NCtrl.bDriveReady
7 Drive application
________________________________________________________________
7.5.3 Terminals 11
X4
GND
Speed setpoint A1U
AR
12I
Manual DC-injection braking (DCB) DI2
increase speed DI3
Motor potentiometer
decrease speed DI4
+
DO1 DriveReady
X101
NO
COM
DriveFail

DI1 LA_NCtrl.bSetSpeedCcw
DI2 LA_NCtrl.bSetDCBrake
DI3 LA_NCtrl.bMPotUp NO, COM LA_NCtrl.bDriveFail
DI4 LA_NCtrl.bMPotDown DO1 LA_NCtrl.bDriveReady
7.5.4 Terminals 16
X4
GND
Speed setpoint A1U
AR
12I
Cw rotation - quick stop DI3
CCw rotation - quick stop DI4
+
DO1 DriveReady
X101
NO
COM
DriveFail

DI3 LA_NCtrl. bRLQCw NO, COM LA_NCtrl.bDriveFail
DI4 LA_NCtrl. bRLQCcw DO1 LA_NCtrl.bDriveReady
7 Drive application
________________________________________________________________
7.5.5 Keypad
X4
GND
A1U
AR
12I
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
+
DO1 DriveReady
X101
NO
COM
DriveFail
Menu Code Action
-3- ESC
C007 ESC
0020
_ ` _ ` _ `
C728 c003 Speed setpoint

C727 c001 Quick stop
c002 Manual DC-injection braking (DCB)
c003 Direction of rotation CCw
c004 Selection of fixed setpoint 1/3
c005 Selection of fixed setpoint 2/3

RFR LA_NCtrl.bFailReset A1U -
DI1 -
DI2 -
DI3 - NO, COM LA_NCtrl.bDriveFail
DI4 - DO1 LA_NCtrl.bDriveReady
7 Drive application
________________________________________________________________
7.5.6 PC
X4
GND
A1U
AR
12I
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
+
DO1 DriveReady
X101
NO
COM
DriveFail
C472/1 Speed setpoint

C470/3 Manual DC-injection braking (DCB)
C470/4 Direction of rotation CCw
C470/1 Selection of fixed setpoint 1/3
C470/2 Selection of fixed setpoint 2/3

RFR LA_NCtrl.bFailReset A1U -
DI1 -
DI2 -
DI3 - NO, COM LA_NCtrl.bDriveFail
DI4 - DO1 LA_NCtrl.bDriveReady
In this control mode, the control is executed via "free" parameters. The connection to inputs/out-
puts of the application takes place via the following system blocks:
System block Function

LS_DisFree Any four 16-bit signals of the application can be displayed on display codes
LS_DisFree_a Any four analog signals of the application can be displayed on display codes
LS_DisFree_b Any eight digital signals of the application can be displayed on a bit-coded display
code
LS_ParFree_a Output of 4 parameterisable analog signals
LS_ParFree_b Output of 16 parameterisable digital signals
8 Diagnostics & error management
8.1 Basics on error handling in the controller
________________________________________________________________

This chapter provides information on error handling, drive diagnostics, and fault analysis.
8.1 Basics on error handling in the controller
Many of the functions integrated into the controller can

• detect errors and thus protect the device from damage or overload, e.g. short-circuit detection,
Ixt overload detection, overtemperature detection, etc.
• detect operating errors by the user, e.g. a missing memory module,
• output warning signals, e.g. if the speed is too high or too low, etc.
Depending on the importance, the error detection in the device responds very fast (e.g. short-circuit
detection < 1 ms) or in a slower cycle (e.g. temperature monitoring approx. 100 ms).
All functions provided with an error detection (e.g. the motor control) supply information to a so-
called error handler. The error handler is processed every 1 ms and evaluates all information.
In this evaluation, the current error (display in C165) is generated and the controller is caused to take
the respective error status (e.g. trouble.
The error information in C166/1..3 is used for error diagnosis and contains the following informati-
on:
1. Error type (e.g. "Warning")
2. Error subject area (e.g. "motor management/encoder")
3. The error ID within the error subject area
Together all types of information form the real error number which is unique in the whole device
system.Structure of the error number (bit coding) ( 153)
In addition to the control of the device state by the error handler, a logbook function records the er-
rors and their histories. Logbook ( 146)
 Tip!
For many device errors, the error type and hence the response of the controller to the error
can be parameterised. Setting the error response ( 150)
8.2 Drive diagnostics with the »Engineer«
________________________________________________________________
 Information on the drive diagnostics with the integrated keypad can be found in the
chapter "Introduction" in the subchapter "Internal Keypad":
LED status display ( 19)
Display messages ( 20)
When an online connection to the controller has been established, the connected controller can be
diagnosed and relevant actual controller states can be displayed in a clearly arranged visualisation
using the »Engineer« :
Button Function
 Display all active sources of a controller inhibit.
 Display all active sources of a quick stop.
Resetting an error Acknowledge fault message (if the error cause has been eliminated).
Logbook... Display the Logbook of the controller. ( 146)
Monitoring... Configure the Monitoring. ( 148)
Device state... Display the internal state machine including the current device state.
Drive control... Display the bit assignment of the following control-related words:
• Cause of controller inhibit (C158)
• Cause of quick stop QSP (C159)
• Status word (C150)
• Extended status word (C155)
Device information... Display identification data, e.g. information on firmware version.
________________________________________________________________
 How to diagnose a drive with the »Engineer«:

1. Go to the Project view and select the 8400 BaseLine D controller.
2. Click the icon or execute the OnlineGo online command to establish an online con-
nection to the controller.
3. Select the Diagnostics tab.
• With an online connection, the Diagnostics tab displays current status information
about the controller.
Related topics:
Device control (DCTRL) ( 45)
8.3 Drive diagnostics via bus system
________________________________________________________________
8.3 Drive diagnostics via bus system
The following display parameters contain actual values, states, and error messages.
• These parameters are listed in the »Engineer« parameter list in the Diagnostics category.
• A detailed description of these parameters can be found in the chapter "Parameter reference"
( 164).
Parameter Display
C051 MCTRL: Actual speed value
C052 Motor voltage
C053 DC-bus voltage
C054 Motor current
C056/1 Torque setpoint
C056/2 Actual torque
C058 Output frequency
C059 Appl.: Reference frequency C11
C061 Heatsink temperature
C137 Device state
C150 Status word
C155 Status word 2
C158 Cause of controller inhibit
C159 Cause of quick stop QSP
C165/1 Current error
C166/1 Error type, current
C166/2 Error subject area, current
C166/3 Error ID, current
C168/1...8 Error ID, history 1 ... 8
C169/1...8 Time of error, history 1 ... 8
C170/1...8 Error counter, history 1 ... 8
C177/1 Switching cycles mains switching
C177/2 Switching cycles output relay
C178 Time the controller was enabled (elapsed-hour meter)
C179 Power-up time (power-on time meter)
8.4 Logbook
________________________________________________________________
8.4 Logbook
The integrated logbook function of the controller chronologically logs important events within the
system. The logbook is intended to support you in troubleshooting and controller diagnostics.
Events that can be logged

The following events can be logged in the logbook:
• Error messages of the operating system ( 153)
• Error messages generated by the application (via LS_SetError_1)
Information saved
For each event, the following information is saved in the logbook:
• Type of response to the event (e.g. "Warning")
• Subject area that activated the event (e. g. "motor management/encoder").
• Event
• Value of power-on time meter
Memory depth
Maximum number of logbook entries: 8
8.4.1 Functional description
The structure of the logbook corresponds to a ring buffer:
• As long as free logbook memory locations are available, the ent-

ries will be saved to the next free memory location ().
Q
• If all memory locations are occupied, the oldest entry () will be
Q Q[
deleted in favour of a new entry.
Q
• The newest entries will always remain available.
Q
Q
 Note!
In the event of a supply voltage failure, the logbook is saved and reloaded automatically
when the controller is switched on. This ensures that the error history of the device does
not get lost. For this reason it is very important to act with caution when deleting the log-
book entries.
8.4 Logbook
________________________________________________________________
8.4.2 Reading out logbook entries
We recommend to read out logbook entries with the »Engineer«, since the »Engineer« shows the
entries clearly arranged and enables them to be exported into a log file. Alternatively, the corres-
ponding parameters can be read out using the keypad or via the fieldbus.
 How to display logbook entries in the »Engineer«:

2. Click the icon or execute the OnlineGo online command to establish an online con-
nection to the controller.
3. Select the Diagnostics tab from the Workspace.
4. Click Logbook.
• The Logbook dialog box with logbook entries is displayed.
• Click Delete to delete an entry from the logbook.
• Click Export to export the entries from the logbook into a *.log file.Exporting logbook
entries to a file ( 147)
5. Click the Close button to close the Logbook dialog box again.
8.4.3 Exporting logbook entries to a file
 How to export the logbook entries to a file:

1. Go to the Logbook dialog box and click the Export... button.
• The Export logbook dialog box is displayed.
2. Specify the folder, file name, and file type for the file.
3. Click the Save button to export the logbook entries to the specified file.
• Hidden logbook entries are not exported, i.e. the filter criteria specified are accounted for
during the export.
• The logbook entries are written to the file in the form of a semicolon separated list.
8.5 Monitoring
________________________________________________________________
8.5 Monitoring
The controller is provided with various monitoring functions which protect the drive against imper-
missible operating conditions.
• If a monitoring function responds,
• an entry will be made into the Logbook of the controller,
• the response (Trouble, Fault, etc.) set for this monitoring function will be triggered,
• the status of the internal device control changes according to the selected response, control-
ler inhibit is set, and the front "DRIVE ERROR" LED D ("DRIVE ERROR") goes on:
Response Entry in the Display in Pulse inhibit Controller in- Acknow- LED D
logbook C168 hibit ledgement "DRIVE ERROR"
required
None OFF
Fault     
Trouble    
(after 0.5 s)
WarningLocked   
Related topics:
LED status display ( 19)
Device overload monitoring (Ixt) ( 104)
Motor load monitoring (I2xt) ( 105)
Brake resistor monitoring (I2xt) ( 107)
Mains phase failure monitoring ( 108)
8.5 Monitoring
________________________________________________________________
8.5.1 Monitoring configuration
 How to configure the monitoring functions using the »Engineer«:

2. Select the Diagnostics tab from the Workspace.
3. Click the Monitoring... button.
• The 8400 monitoring configuration dialog box is displayed via which the desired settings
can be made:
Related topics:
Setting the error response ( 150)
8.5 Monitoring
________________________________________________________________
8.5.2 Setting the error response
When a monitoring function responds, the response set for this monitoring function (Trouble, Fault,
etc.) will be triggered.
• For many monitoring functions the response can be individually parameterised via parameters.
 Tip!
The table in chapter "Short overview (A-Z)" contains the error messages for which the re-
sponse can be set . ( 156)
Warning thresholds
Some of the monitoring functions are activated if a defined warning threshold has been exceeded.
• The corresponding preset threshold values can be changed via the following parameters:

Value Unit
C120 Motor overload threshold (I²xt) 100 %

C123 Device utilisat. threshold (Ixt) 100 %
C909/1 Max. positive speed 120 %
C909/2 Max. negative speed 120 %
C910/1 Max. positive output frequency 300 Hz
C910/2 Max. negative output frequency 300 Hz
8.6 Maloperation of the drive
________________________________________________________________
Maloperation Cause Remedy

Motor does not rota- DC-bus voltage is too low Check mains voltage
te • Red LED is blinking every 1 s
Controller is inhibited Deactivate controller inhibit
• Green LED is blinking • Note: Controller inhibit can be set via se-
veral sources !
• C158 displays all active sources for cont-
roller inhibit.
Automatic start is inhibited LOW/HIGH edge at RFR
If required, correct auto-start option in C142.
"Inhibit at power-on" auto-start option
DC-injection braking (DCB) is active Deactivate DC-injection braking
Mechanical motor brake is not released Release mechanical motor brake manually or
electrically
Quick stop (QSP) active Deactivate quick stop
• Note: Quick stop can be set via several
sources!
• C159 displays all active sources for quick
stop.
Setpoint = 0 Select setpoint
Setpoint = 0 with activated fixed setpoint Set fixed setpoint in C039/1...3
Trouble is active Clear fault
C006 = 4 "SLVC: Vector control" has been set, Carry out automatic motor parameter identi-
but no motor parameter identification has fication with the C002/23 device command
been carried out. Automatic motor data identification
Assignment of several mutually exclusive Correct configuration in C701
functions with a signal source in C701
Motor rotates irregu- Motor cable is defective Check motor cable
larly
Maximum motor current in motor or genera- Adjust settings to the application: C022:
tor mode is set too low Imax in motor mode
C023: Imax in generator mode
Motor is underexcited or overexcited Check parameterisation:
C006: Motor control
C015: VFC: V/f base frequency
C016: VFC: Vmin boost
Rated motor data (stator resistance, speed, Carry out automatic motor parameter identi-
current, frequency, voltage) and cos ϕ and/ fication with the C002/23 device command
or magnetising inductance is not adapted to - or -
the motor data Adjust motor parameters manually:
C084: Motor stator resistance
C087: Rated motor speed
C088: Rated motor current
C089: Rated motor frequency
C090: Rated motor voltage
C091: Motor cosine phi
Motor windings are wired incorrectly Reverse from star connection to delta con-
nection
________________________________________________________________
Maloperation Cause Remedy

Motor consumes too Umin boost has been selected too high Correct setting with C016
much current
V/f base frequency has been selected too low Correct setting with C015
Rated motor data (stator resistance, speed, Carry out automatic motor parameter identi-
current, frequency, voltage) and cos ϕ and/ fication with the C002/23 device command
or magnetising inductance is not adapted to - or -
the motor data Adjust motor parameters manually:
C084: Motor stator resistance
C087: Rated motor speed
C088: Rated motor current
C089: Rated motor frequency
C090: Rated motor voltage
C091: Motor cosine phi
Motor parameter Motor is too small compared to the rated de- Use device with lower rated power
identification is abor- vice power (>1 : 3)
ted with error LP1
DC injection braking (DCB) is active via termi- Deactivate DC-injection braking
nal
Drive behaviour with different Optimise or manually adapt vector control
vector control is not Sensorless vector control (SLVC)
satisfactory
Carry out automatic motor parameter identi-
fication with the C002/23 device command
Automatic motor data identification
Torque dip in field Motor is overloaded Check motor load
weakening range
Motor windings are wired incorrectly Reverse from star connection to delta con-
or nection
motor stalling when
being operated in the V/f base frequency is set too high Correct setting with C015
field weakening ran- Mains voltage is too low Increase mains voltage
ge
8.7 Error messages of the operating system
________________________________________________________________
This chapter describes all error messages of the controller operating system and possible causes &
remedies.
 Tip!
Each error message is also saved in the logbook in chronological order. Logbook ( 146)
8.7.1 Structure of the error number (bit coding)
If an error occurs in the controller, the internal fault memory saves a 32-bit value which contains the
following information:
 Reserved
0 1 2 3  Error type
Bit 31 30 29 26 25 16 15 0
 Error subject area
 Error ID
[8-1] Structure of the error number
For the sake of legibiltiy, the error number in the logbook is displayed with the following syntax:
[Error type].[Error subject area no.].[Error ID]
8.7.1.1 Error type

Bit 31 30 29 26 25 16 15 0
The error type gives information about the behaviour/response of the controller to the error. The er-
ror type for some device errors can also be parameterised.
Bit 29 Bit 28 Bit 27 Bit 26 Meaning

0 0 0 0 0: No response
0 0 0 1 1: Fault
0 0 1 0 2: Trouble
0 1 0 0 4: WarningLocked
________________________________________________________________
8.7.1.2 Error subject area
Bit 31 30 29 26 25 16 15 0
The error subject area indicates the internal "function unit" of the controller in which the error has
occurred:
Error subject area Assigned errors Remedy possible by

user?
No. Name
111 Supply voltage Errors that occur in connection with the supply voltage of the device. Yes
119 Temperature Errors that occur for temperature reasons. Yes
123 Motor management / encoder Errors that occur within the motor control or encoder evaluation. Yes
125 Analog I/O Errors that occur in connection with the analog inputs and outputs. Yes
144 Parameter set Errors that occur in connection with the parameter set or the parame- Yes if the error relates to a
ter set memory (memory module). missing or incompatible
memory module.
145 Device firmware (internal error) Internal error of the device firmware. No
400 Device hardware defective Errors that occur due to defective device hardware. No
980 US01: User error 1 Errors generated by the user (by the application) via the Yes
LS_SetError_1 system block.
981 US02: User error 2
8.7.1.3 Error ID
Bit 31 30 29 26 25 16 15 0
16-bit value (0 ... 65535) for error identification within the error subject area.
________________________________________________________________
8.7.1.4 Example for bit coding of the error number

In C168 displays the internal error number "75169803".
• This decimal value corresponds to the following bit sequence:
0 1 2 3
Bit 31 30 29 26 25 16 15 0
00000100011110110000000000001101
Assignment Information Meaning in the example

Reserved -
00
Error type 1: Fault (pulse inhibit)

0001
Error subject area 123: Motor management / encoder

0001111011
Error ID 13: "LU: DC bus undervoltage"

0000000000001011
• Thus, error number "75169803" means:

An overcurrent has been detected in the "Motor management/encoder" subject area. A pulse in-
hibit is set as error response. The error message must be acknowledged after the error has been
eliminated.
8.7.2 Reset of error message
An error message with the response "Fault", "Trouble", or "Warning locked" must be explicitly reset
(acknowledged) after the cause of the error has been eliminated.
 To reset (acknowledge) a pending error message, execute the device command C002/
19 = "1" .
 Tip!
With an online connection to the controller, use the Diagnostics tab of the »Engineer« and
click Error message reset to reset a pending error message.
________________________________________________________________
8.7.3 Short overview (A-Z)
The table below contains all error messages of the controller operating system in alphabetical order.
 Note!
For the sake of legibility, the Logbook and C165 display the error number with the follo-
wing syntax:
[Error type].[Error subject area no.].[.].[Error ID]
In this documentation, "xx", a wildcard, stands for the error type since it is configurable
for many error messages.
 Tip!
If you click the cross-reference in the first column, "Error number", you get to the detailed
description of the respective error message in the subsequent "Cause & possible remedies"
chapter. ( 157)
Error number Error message Response can be set in CAN Emergency

(Lenze setting) Error Code
xx.0125.00001 An01: AIN1_I < 4 mA Fault C598/1 0xF000
xx.0145.00001 dF01: Internal error 01 Fault -
xx.0400.00105 dH69: Adjustment data error Fault - 0x5530
xx.0123.00057 ID1: Motor data identification error WarningLocked - 0xF000
xx.0123.00015 LU: DC bus undervoltage Trouble C600/1 0x3100
xx.0123.00016 OC1: Power section - short circuit Fault - 0x2000
xx.0123.00017 OC2: Power section - earth fault Fault - 0x2000
xx.0119.00050 OC5: Ixt overload WarningLocked C604 0x2000
xx.0123.00105 OC6: I2xt motor overload WarningLocked C606 0x2000
xx.0119.00052 OC9: Ixt overload - shutdown limit Fault - 0x2000
xx.0123.00065 OC12: I2xt brake resistance overload Fault - 0xF000
xx.0119.00001 OH: Heatsink overtemperature Fault - 0x4000
xx.0123.00014 OU: DC bus overvoltage Trouble - 0x3100
xx.0144.00001 PS01: No memory module Warning - 0x6300
xx.0144.00002 PS02: Par. set invalid Fault - 0x6300
xx.0144.00003 PS03: Par. set device invalid Fault - 0x6300
xx.0144.00004 PS04: Par. set device incompatible Fault - 0x6300
xx.0144.00031 PS31: Ident. error Fault - 0x6300
xx.0111.00002 Su02: One mains phase is missing WarningLocked C565 0x3000
xx.0980.00000 US01: User error 1 Fault C581/1 0x6200
xx.0981.00000 US02: User error 2 Fault C581/2 0x6200
________________________________________________________________
8.7.4 Cause & possible remedies
This chapter contains all error messages of the controller operating system in numerical order of the
error numbers. The list provides detailed information on the response to the error message as well
as information on the cause & possible remedies.
 Note!
For the sake of legibility, the Logbook and C165 display the error number with the follo-
wing syntax:
[Error type].[Error subject area no.].[.].[Error ID]
In this documentation, "xx", a wildcard, stands for the error type since it is configurable
for many error messages.
 Tip!
A list of all error messages of the controller operating system in alphabetical order can be
found in the previous chapter "Short overview (A-Z)" ( 156).
Su02: One mains phase is missing [xx.0111.00002]
Response (Lenze setting printed in bold) Setting: C565 ( Adjustable response)

 None  Fault  Trouble  WarningLocked
Cause Remedy
One mains phase of a three-phase supply has failed. Check mains connection (terminal X100).
OH: Heatsink overtemperature [xx.0119.00001]
Response (Lenze setting printed in bold)

 None  Fault  Trouble  WarningLocked
Cause Remedy
The heatsink temperature is higher than the fixed limit • Check control cabinet temperature.
temperature (90 ° C). • Clean filter.
Maybe the ambient temperature of the controller is too • Clean controller.
high or the fan or its ventilation slots are dirty. • If required, clean or replace the fan.
• Provide for sufficient cooling of the device.
OC5: Ixt overload [xx.0119.00050]

Cause Remedy
The Ixt overload check has tripped. • Check and, if required, correct dimensioning of the
• Operating threshold = 100 % Ixt (adjustable in C123) device and the motor load with regard to technical
Possible causes: data.
• Wrong dimensioning of the device with regard to its • Reduce motor load cycles (observe load cycles accor-
motor load. ding to documentation).
• Load cycles are not complied with.
________________________________________________________________
OC9: Ixt overload - shutdown limit [xx.0119.00052]

 None  Fault  Trouble  WarningLocked
Cause Remedy
The Ixt overload check has tripped. • Check and, if required, correct dimensioning of the
• Operating threshold = 110 % Ixt (fixed) device and the motor load with regard to technical
Possible causes: data.
• Wrong dimensioning of the device with regard to its • Reduce motor load cycles (observe load cycles accor-
motor load. ding to documentation).
• Load cycles are not complied with.
OU: DC bus overvoltage [xx.0123.00014]

 None  Fault  Trouble  WarningLocked
Cause Remedy
The device has detected an overvoltage in the DC bus. To • Reduce load in generator mode.
protect the device hardware, the inverter control is swit- • Use a brake resistor.
ched off. • Use a regenerative power supply unit.
• Depending on the configuration of the auto-start lock • Establish a DC-bus connection.
function, C142 serves to set that, if this error has been
tripped, the controller only starts after the controller
inhibit is switched.
• If this error message remains active longer than the
time set in C601 a "Fault" is tripped.
LU: DC bus undervoltage [xx.0123.00015]
Response (Lenze setting printed in bold) Setting: C600/1 ( Adjustable response)

 None  Fault  Trouble  WarningLocked
Cause Remedy
The device has detected a DC bus undervoltage. The in- • Switch on mains supply or ensure sufficient supply via
verter control is switched off because the drive proper- DC bus.
ties of the motor control cannot be provided anymore • Adjust setting in C142 if required.
due to the DC bus undervoltage.
• Depending on the configuration of the auto-start lock
function, C142 serves to set that, if this error has been
tripped, the controller only starts after the controller
inhibit is switched.
OC1: Power section - short circuit [xx.0123.00016]

Cause Remedy
The device has recognised a short circuit of the motor • Check motor connections and the corresponding plug
phases. To protect the device electronics, the inverter connector on the device.
control is switched off. • Only use permissible combinations of device power
• Mostly, incorrectly executed motor connections are and motor power.
the cause. • Do not set the dynamics of the current limitation con-
• If the device is inappropriately dimensioned with re- troller too high.
gard to the motor load and the current limitation in
the controller (Imax controller) is set incorrectly, this
error message may also occur.
Motor control: Defining current limits
________________________________________________________________
OC2: Power section - earth fault [xx.0123.00017]

Cause Remedy
The device has recognised an earth fault at one of the • Check motor connections and the corresponding plug
motor phases. To protect the device electronics, the in- connector on the device.
verter control is switched off. • Use motor filters, cable lengths, and cable types re-
• Mostly, incorrectly executed motor connections are commended by Lenze.
the cause.
• If motor filter, motor cable length, and cable type
(shielding capacity) are dimensioned incorrectly, this
error message may occur due to leakage currents to
PE.
ID1: Motor data identification error [xx.0123.00057]

 None  Fault  Trouble  WarningLocked
Cause Remedy
The device has detected an error during the motor data • Check the motor connections and the corresponding
identification. plug connector on the device and, if necessary, the
Possible causes: motor terminal box.
• Interrupted motor cable. • Correct start parameters for the motor parameter
• Switched-off power section during the identification. identification (motor nameplate data).
• Implausible start parameter settings. • Stable power supply of the device.
OC12: I2xt overload - brake resistor [xx.0123.00065]

Cause Remedy
Too frequent and too long braking processes. Check drive dimensioning.
OC6: I2xt overload - motor [xx.0123.00105]

Cause Remedy
Thermal overload of the motor. • Observe load requirements.

• Correct dimensioning if necessary.
• In case of VFCplus operation: Check Vmin boost
(C016).
Set Vmin boost
An01: AIN1_I < 4 mA [xx.0125.00001]

 None  Fault  Trouble  WarningLocked
Cause Remedy
Open-circuit monitoring for analog input has tripped. • Check wiring of the analog X4/A1U input terminal for
• Only if the analog input has been configured as a cur- open circuit.
rent loop of 4 ... 20 (C034/1 = 2). • Check connection of the external 250-Ω load resistor
between the terminals A1U and GND.
• Check minimum current values of the signal sources.
________________________________________________________________
PS01: No memory module [xx.0144.00001]

 None  Fault  Trouble  WarningLocked
Cause Remedy
Memory module is either not available or not snapped • If a memory module has been provided: Plug the me-
into place correctly. mory module into the slot of the standard device in-
tended for this purpose.
• If a memory module has been provided: Check if the
memory module has been plugged-in correctly.
PS02: Par. set invalid [xx.0144.00002]

Cause Remedy
The parameter set saved to the memory module is inva- Ensure voltage supply during the storage process and
lid because it has not been saved completely. that the module remains plugged into the slot.
• This can be due to voltage failure or caused by remo-
ving the memory module while saving the parameter
set.
PS03: Par. set device invalid [xx.0144.00003]

Cause Remedy
The parameter set in the device is invalid. Consultation with Lenze required.
PS04: Par. set device incompatible [xx.0144.00004]

 No Reaction  Fault  Trouble  Warning
Cause Remedy
The parameter set saved to the memory module is in- When the memory modules are exchanged, observe the
compatible to the standard device. downward compatibility:
• An incompatibility of the parameter set is caused e.g. • OK: BaseLine V2.0 to BaseLine V3.0
when the memory module of an 8400 StateLine is • Not OK: StateLine Vx.x to BaseLine Vx.x
plugged into an 8400 BaseLine or the parameter set in • Not OK: BaseLine V3.0 to BaseLine < V3.0
the memory module has a higher version than expec-
ted by the standard device.
PS31: Ident. error [xx.0144.00031]

Cause Remedy
Incompatible or unknown HW components have been • Check which HW components are faulty (C203/x: Pro-
found. duct type code).
• Check temperature range of the device at the start.
• Check whether a software update at Lenze is possible.
________________________________________________________________
dF01: Internal error 01 [xx.0145.00001]

Cause Remedy
Device error • Reduce switching frequency (C018) to 4 kHz.

• If the problem occurs again, you needs to consult Len-
ze.

Cause Remedy
Device error • Mains switching or restart of the controller, respec-

tively.
ze.

Cause Remedy

tively.
ze.

Cause Remedy

tively.
ze.

Cause Remedy

tively.
ze.
________________________________________________________________

Cause Remedy

tively.
ze.

Cause Remedy

tively.
ze.

Cause Remedy

tively.
ze.

Cause Remedy

tively.
ze.

Cause Remedy

tively.
ze.
________________________________________________________________
dH69: Adjustment fault [xx.0400.00105]

Cause Remedy
Device error Consultation with Lenze required.
US01: User error 1 [xx.0980.00000]

Cause Remedy
User error 1 has been tripped via the bSetError1 input of User-defined.
the LS_SetError_1 system block.
US02: User error 2 [xx.0981.00000]

Cause Remedy
User error 2 has been tripped via the bSetError2 input of User-defined.
the LS_SetError_1 system block.
9 Parameter reference
________________________________________________________________
This chapter describes all parameters which can be used for parameterising and monitoring the
controller.
Parameters which are only available in the controller from a certain software version onwards are
marked with a corresponding note in the parameter description ("from version xx.xx.xx").
The parameter descriptions are based on the software version V03.04.00
 Tip!
For quick reference of a parameter with a certain name, simply use the index of the online
documentation. The index always contains the corresponding code in parentheses after
the name.
General information on parameter setting can be found in the chapter entitled
"Introduction: Parameterising the controller". ( 13)
For general information on how to read and change parameters, please see the online do-
cumentation for the »Engineer«.
9.1 Structure of the parameter descriptions
________________________________________________________________
Each parameter is described in the Parameter list in the form of a table which consists of the follo-
wing three areas:
Table header
The table header contains the following general information:
• Parameter number (Cxxxxx)
• Parameter name (display text in the »Engineer» and keypad)
• Data type
• Parameter index in decimal and hexadecimal notation for access via a fieldbus (e.g. CAN system
bus).
 Tip!
The parameter index is calculated as follows:
• Index [dec] = 24575 - code
• Index [hex] = 0x5FFF - code
Example for code C00005:
• Index [dec] = 24575 - 5 = 24570
• Index [hex] = 0x5FFF - 0x{5} = 0x5FFA
Table contents
The table contains further general explanations & notes on the parameter and the possible settings,
which are represented in different ways depending on the parameter type:
• Parameters with read-only access
• Parameters with write access
Table footer
The table footer contains the Parameter attributes.
________________________________________________________________
9.1.1 Data type
The parameters can be of the following data types:
Data type Meaning

INTEGER_16 16-bit value with sign
INTEGER_32 32-bit value with sign
UNSIGNED_8 8-bit value without sign
VISIBLE_STRING String of characters from printable characters
9.1.2 Parameters with read-only access
Parameters for which the "write access" attribute has not been set, can only be read. They cannot be
changed by the user.
Description structure
Parameter | Name: Data type: _______

Cxxxxx | _____________ Index: _______
Description
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
 Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1
Representation in the »Engineer«

The »Engineer« displays these parameters with a grey background or, with an online connection,
with a pale-yellow background:
________________________________________________________________
9.1.3 Parameters with write access
Only parameters with a check mark () in front of the "write access" attribute can be changed by
the user. The Lenze setting for these parameters is printed in bold.
• The settings can either be selected from a selection list or the values can be entered directly.
• Values outside the valid setting range are represented in red in the »Engineer«.
9.1.3.1 Parameters with setting range

Cxxxxx | _____________ Index: _______
Description
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
 Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1
Parameter setting in the »Engineer«

In the »Engineer«, parameters are set by entering the desired value into the input field:
9.1.3.2 Parameters with selection list

Cxxxxx | _____________ Index: _______
Description
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold)
1
2
3
________________________________________________________________

In the »Engineer«, a list field is used for parameter setting:
9.1.3.3 Parameters with bit-coded setting

Cxxxxx | _____________ Index: _______
Description
Value is bit-coded:
Bit 0
...
Bit 31

The »Engineer« uses a dialog box for parameter setting in which the individual bits can be set or re-
set. Alternatively, the value can be entered as a decimal or hexadecimal value:
________________________________________________________________
9.1.3.4 Parameters with subcodes

Cxxxxx | _____________ Index: _______
Description
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
Subcodes Lenze setting

Cxxxxx/1
Cxxxxx/2
Cxxxxx/3

The »Engineer« parameter list displays each subcode individually. The parameters are set as descri-
bed in the previous chapters.
________________________________________________________________
9.1.4 Parameter attributes
The table footers contain the parameter attributes:

Attribute Meaning
 Read access Read access to parameter possible.
 Write access Write access to parameter possible.
• Please also observe the following attributes:
 CINH Parameter value can only be changed when the controller is inhibi-
ted.
 PLC STOP Parameter value can only be changed when the application is stop-
ped.
 No transfer Parameter is not transferred to controller when the command Download parameter set is
executed.
 COM Communication-relevant parameter
• This parameter is relevant for parameter data transfer via the (CAN) system bus.
 MOT Motor control parameters
Scaling factor
The "scaling factor" is important for parameter access via a bus system.
Signal type Scaling factor Resolution Value range

Analog (scaled) 100 16 bits signed ± 199.9 %
Angular velocity 1 16 bits signed ± 32767 increments/ms
Position in [units] 10000 32 bits signed ± 214748.3647 [units]
Digital (BOOL) 1 8 bits unsigned 0 ≡ FALSE; 1 ≡ TRUE
Time 1000 16 bits unsigned 0 ... 999.000 s
Selection value 1 16 bits unsigned 0 ... 65535
Example 1: The value "654" of the parameter C00028/1 (AIN1: input voltage) read via a bus system
must be divided by the corresponding scaling factor "100" to obtain the actual display value
"6.54 V".
Read value (via bus system)

----------------------------------------------------------------------- = Indicated value (Engineer)
Scaling factor
[9-1] Conversion formula for read access via bus system
Example 2: In order to set the parameter C00012 (acceleration time main setpoint) to the value
"123.45 %" via a bus system, the integer value "12345" must be transferred, i.e. the value to be set
must be multiplied by the corresponding scaling factor "100".
Value to be written (via bus system) = Value to be set ⋅ Scaling factor

[9-2] Conversion formula for write access via bus system
9.2 Parameter list
________________________________________________________________
9.2 Parameter list
This chapter lists all parameters of the operating system in numerically ascending order.
 Note!
The parameter descriptions are based on the software version V03.04.00.
C00002
Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_8

C00002 | Device commands Index: 24573d = 5FFDh
Note:
• Before switching off the supply voltage after carrying out a device command, check whether the device com-
mand has been carried out successfully via the status display under C00003!
• Before activating the device commands through a master control, please wait for the "ready" message of the
controller.
• The device will reject a write process to C00002/x if the value is >1 and issue an error message.
Drive control (DCTRL): Device commands
Selection list
0 Off / ready
1 On / start
2 Work in progress
4 Action cancelled
5 No access
6 No access controller inhibit
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C00002/1 0: Off / ready Load Lenze setting
• All parameters are reset to the Lenze setting.
• Only possible when the controller is inhibited.
C00002/2 0: Off / ready Load parameter set 1
• Load parameter set 1 from the memory module.
C00002/3 0: Off / ready Reserved
C00002/7 0: Off / ready Save parameter set 1
• Saving parameter set 1 in the memory module safe
against mains failure.
C00002/11 0: Off / ready Save all parameter sets
• All parameter sets are saved in the memory module
with mains failure protection.
C00002/12 0: Off / ready Import EPM data
• Setting "1: On / start" activates the automatic import
of parameters of the memory module after the error
message "PS04".
9.2 Parameter list
________________________________________________________________

C00002 | Device commands Index: 24573d = 5FFDh

C00002/16 1: On / start Enable controller
"1" ≡ Enable controller
"0" ≡ Inhibit controller
C00002/17 0: Off / ready Activate quick stop
"1" ≡ Activate quick stop
"0" ≡ Deactivate quick stop
C00002/19 0: Off / ready Reset error
• After resetting the current error, further errors may be
pending which must be reset as well.
• Details of the currently pending error are displayed in
C00166.
C00002/21 0: Off / ready Delete logbook
• All entries in the controller logbook will be deleted.
• In the logbook, information on the error history is sa-
ved.
C00002/23 0: Off / ready Identify motor parameters
• This device command serves to carry out an auto-
matic identification of the motor parameters.
• The device command is only executed when the con-
troller is in the "SwitchedOn" state.
• In order to identify the motor parameters, the cont-
roller must be enabled after this device command.
Identifying motor parameters automatically
 Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1
9.2 Parameter list | C00003
________________________________________________________________
C00003

C00003 | Status of last device command Index: 24572d = 5FFCh
Status of the device command carried out last (C00002).
Note:
Before switching off the supply voltage after carrying out a device command, check whether the device command
has been carried out successfully via the status display!
Drive control (DCTRL): Device commands
Selection list (read only) Info
0 Successful Device command has been carried out successfully.
1 Command unknown Device command is implausible or not known in the sys-
tem.
2 No access Access for requested device command is not approved.
3 Time-out Device command could not be processed in the defined
time (time-out).
 Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00006

C00006 | Motor control Index: 24569d = 5FF9h
Selection of the motor control mode

Motor control (MCTRL): Select control mode
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) Info
4 SLVC: Vector control This control type is used for sensorless vector control of
an asynchronous motor.
• The control type requires motor parameters to be set
as exactly as possible!
Sensorless vector control
6 VFCplus: V/f linear This control type is used for the speed control of an asyn-
chronous motor via a linear V/f characteristic and is the
simplest control type.
• For setting the V/f characteristic, only the rated fre-
quency (C00089) and the rated voltage (C00090) of
the motor have to be entered.
V/f characteristic control
8 VFCplus: V/f quadr This control type is used for speed control of an asynchro-
nous motor via a square-law V/f characteristic.
• For setting the V/f characteristic, only the rated fre-
quency (C00089) and the rated voltage (C00090) of
the motor have to be entered.
V/f characteristic control
________________________________________________________________
C00007

C00007 | Control mode Index: 24568d = 5FF8h
Selection of how the application is to be controlled.

0 Wiring has changed This display appears when the preset configuration has
been reparameterised via the connection parameters.
10 Terminals 0 The technology application is controlled via the digital
input terminals of the controller:
• DI1 = fixed setpoint 1/3
• DI3 = activate DC injection braking
• DI4 = change of direction of rotation
• DI3 = quick stop
• DI2 = activate DC injection braking
• DI3 = motor potentiometer: Higher speed
• DI4 = motor potentiometer: Lower speed
• DI3 = CW rotation/quick stop
• DI4 = CCW rotation/quick stop
20 Keypad The technology application is controlled via the keypad:
 C00002: Device commands
 C00003: Status of last device command
 C00727: Executing control commands
 C00728: Selecting analog setpoints
 Increase speed
 Reduce speed
21 PC The technology application is controlled via the "Free pa-
rameters" of the controller (PC control).
C00010
Parameter | Name: Data type: INTEGER_16

C00010 | Minimum analog setpoint Index: 24565d = 5FF5h
As of version 03.00.00
Lower limit for analog input
Analog terminals
0.0 % 100.0
C00010/1 0.0 % Min. analog setpoint
________________________________________________________________
C00011

C00011 | Appl.: Reference speed Index: 24564d = 5FF4h
Setting the reference speed

• In the controller, all speed-related signals are processed to one reference variable in percent.
• Set a reference speed here that corresponds to 100 %.
• The frequency of the set reference speed is displayed in C00059.
Note:
This is not a maximum limitation!
All values in percent in the controller may be in the range of 0 ... 199.99 %.
50 rpm 9999 1500 rpm
C00012

C00012 | Acceleration time main setpoint Index: 24563d = 5FF3h
FB L_NSet_1: Acceleration time of the ramp generator for the main speed setpoint
0.0 s 999.9 2.0 s
C00013

C00013 | Deceleration time main setpoint Index: 24562d = 5FF2h
FB L_NSet_1: Deceleration time of the ramp generator for the main speed setpoint
0.0 s 999.9 2.0 s
C00015

C00015 | VFC: V/f base frequency Index: 24560d = 5FF0h
V/f base frequency for V/f characteristic control (VFCplus)

• The motor voltage increases linearly with the frequency until the base frequency is reached. From this value on,
the motor voltage remains constant, the speed increases and the maximum torque decreases.
• After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor catalogue, the suitable value can be entered auto-
matically. An automatic detection via the motor parameter identification is possible as well.
7.5 Hz 999.9 50.0 Hz
 Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 10
________________________________________________________________
C00016

C00016 | VFC: Vmin boost Index: 24559d = 5FEFh
Boost of the V/f voltage characteristic within the range of low speed or frequency values for the (VFCplus) V/f cha-
racteristic control.
• This may increase the starting torque.
Motor control (MCTRL): Setting Vmin boost
0.0 % 100.0 0.0 %
C00018

C00018 | Switching frequency Index: 24557d = 5FEDh
Selection of the pulse width modulated switching frequency transferred from the inverter to the motor
• When a variable switching frequency is selected, the switching frequency may change as a function of the load
and rotational frequency.
Selection of the switching frequency
21 8 kHz var/4 kHz min.
22 16 kHz var/4 kHz min.
23 16 kHz var/8 kHz min
C00019

C00019 | Auto DCB: Threshold Index: 24556d = 5FECh
Setpoint speed threshold for automatic DC injection braking

• For speed setpoints with values below the thresholds a DC current is injected or the motor is not supplied with
current, depending on the setting.
DC injection braking
0 rpm 9999 3 rpm
________________________________________________________________
C00021

C00021 | Slip comp. Index: 24554d = 5FEAh
Slip compensation for V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) and sensorless vector control (SLVC)
• An increase of the slip compensation causes a greater frequency and voltage increase when the machine is loa-
ded.
Motor control (MCTRL): Optimising the operational performance by slip compensation
-50.00 % 50.00 0.00 %
C00022

C00022 | Imax in motor mode Index: 24553d = 5FE9h
Maximum current in motor mode for all motor control modes

0.00 A 99.99 47.00 A
C00023

C00023 | Imax in generator mode Index: 24552d = 5FE8h
Maximum current in generator mode for all motor control modes

0.0 % 100.0 100.0 %
C00024

C00024 | Comparison value N_Act Index: 24551d = 5FE7h
Threshold for the actual speed comparison

• This parameter serves to set a threshold that is compared with the actual speed value.
• When the value falls below this threshold, the bNactCompare output of the SB LS_DriveInterface switches to
TRUE.
• Switching hysteresis = +1 %
0.0 % 199.9 0.0 %
________________________________________________________________
C00026

C00026 | AINx: Offset Index: 24549d = 5FE5h
Offset for analog input

Analog terminals
-199.9 % 199.9
C00026/1 0.0 % AIN1: Offset
C00027

C00027 | AINx: Gain Index: 24548d = 5FE4h
Gain for analog input

Analog terminals
-199.9 % 199.9
C00027/1 100.0 % AIN1: Gain
C00028

C00028 | AINx: Input voltage Index: 24547d = 5FE3h
Display of the input voltage at the analog input

Analog terminals
-10.0 V 10.0
Subcodes Info
C00028/1 AIN1: Input voltage
C00029

C00029 | AINx: Input current Index: 24546d = 5FE2h
Display of the input current at the analog input

• When the analog input has been configured for current measurement (C00034/1 = 1 or 2).
• When C00034/1 is set = 2 (4 ... 20 mA), 0 ... 16 mA is displayed.
Analog terminals
0.0 mA 20.0
Subcodes Info
C00029/1 AIN1: Input current
________________________________________________________________
C00033

C00033 | AINx: Output value Index: 24542d = 5FDEh
Display of the output value in percent of the analog input amplifier

• 100 % ≡ 16384 ≡ +10 V / +20 mA
Analog terminals
-199.9 % 199.9
Subcodes Info
C00033/1 AIN1: Output value
C00034

C00034 | AINx: Configuration Index: 24541d = 5FDDh
Configuration of the analog input for current or voltage measurement

Analog terminals
Selection list Info
0 0...+10 V Input signal is voltage signal 0 V ... +10 V
• 0 V ... +10 V ≡ 0 % ... +100 %
1 0...+5V With external load resistor (250 Ohms):
Input signal is the current signal 0 mA ... 20 mA
• 0 mA ... 20 mA ≡ 0 % ... +100 %
2 1...+5V (4...20mA) With external load resistor (250 Ohms):
Input signal is the current signal 4 mA ... 20 mA
• 4 mA ... 20 mA ≡ 0 % ... +100 %
• The current loop is monitored for open circuit
(I < 4 mA) by the device.
C00034/1 0: 0...+10 V AIN1: Config.
C00036

C00036 | DCB: Current Index: 24539d = 5FDBh
Current value in [%] for DC-injection braking

DC injection braking
0.0 % 150.0 50.0 %
________________________________________________________________
C00039

C00039 | Fixed setpoint x (L_NSet_1 n-Fix) Index: 24536d = 5FD8h
FB L_NSet_1: Fixed speed setpoints (JOG values) for the setpoint generator
-199.9 % 199.9
C00039/1 40.0 % Fixed setpoint 1
C00050

C00050 | MCTRL: Speed setpoint Index: 24525d = 5FCDh
Display of the speed setpoint at the speed setpoint input of the motor control
-9999 rpm 9999
C00051

C00051 | MCTRL: Actual speed value Index: 24524d = 5FCCh
Display of the actual speed value of the motor shaft
Note:
The displayed value only corresponds to the real actual speed value of the motor shaft if an encoder is connected to
the motor and the evaluation of the feedback signal has been set correctly ("Closed loop" operation).
In case of operation without speed feedback, the signal is calculated from the motor control and thus may not cor-
respond to the real actual speed.
-9999 rpm 9999
C00052

C00052 | Motor voltage Index: 24523d = 5FCBh
Display of the current motor voltage/output voltage of the inverter

0 V 1000
________________________________________________________________
C00053

C00053 | DC-bus voltage Index: 24522d = 5FCAh
Display of the current DC-bus voltage

0 V 1000
C00054

C00054 | Motor current Index: 24521d = 5FC9h
Display of the current motor current/output current of the inverter

0.00 A 300.00
C00056

C00056 | Torque Index: 24519d = 5FC7h
Display of the current torque

-99.00 Nm 99.00
Subcodes Info
C00056/1 Torque setpoint
• Only with sensorless vector control (SLVC).
C00056/2 Actual torque
• Estimated actual torque for all motor control modes.
C00057

C00057 | Maximum torque Index: 24518d = 5FC6h
Display of the maximum torque to be generated by the motor

• The maximum torque to be generated by the motor depends on various factors, e.g. on Imax in motor mode
(C00022) and the motor type used.
0.0 Nm 999.9
C00058

C00058 | Output frequency Index: 24517d = 5FC5h
Display of the current output frequency

-655.0 Hz 655.0
________________________________________________________________
C00059

C00059 | Appl.: Reference frequency C11 Index: 24516d = 5FC4h
Display of the field frequency which corresponds to the reference speed set in C00011.
0.0 Hz 999.9
C00061

C00061 | Heatsink temperature Index: 24514d = 5FC2h
Display of the current heatsink temperature

-50 °C 150
C00064

C00064 | Device utilisation (Ixt) Index: 24511d = 5FBFh
Display of the device utilisation Ixt in different time resolutions

• If the value displayed here exceeds the threshold set in C00123, the fault message "OC5: Device overload (Ixt)"
is output and the fault response set in C00604 is executed (default setting: "Warning").
0 % 250
Subcodes Info
• Maximum value of the pulse utilisation (C00064/2)
and permanent utilisation (C00064/3).
• Pulse utilisation over the last 15 seconds (only for
loads >160 %).
• Permanent utilisation over the last 3 minutes.
C00066

C00066 | Thermal motor load (I²xt) Index: 24509d = 5FBDh
Display of the thermal motor load being detected sensorless via a motor model
• If the value displayed here exceeds the threshold set in C00120, the fault message "OC6: Thermal motor overload
(I2xt)" is output and the fault response set in C00606 is executed (default setting: "Warning").
0 % 200
________________________________________________________________
C00073

C00073 | Vp Imax controller Index: 24502d = 5FB6h
Amplification factor Vp for Imax controller

0.00 16.00 0.25
C00074

C00074 | Ti Imax controller Index: 24501d = 5FB5h
Reset time Ti for Imax controller

12 ms 9990 65 ms
C00081

C00081 | Rated motor power Index: 24494d = 5FAEh
This value can be obtained from the motor nameplate. After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor
catalogue, the suitable value can be entered automatically.
Note:
It is mandatory to give the rated motor power for the sensorless vector control (SLVC).
0.00 kW 99.00 11.00 kW
C00084

C00084 | Motor stator resistance Index: 24491d = 5FABh
After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor catalogue, the suitable value can be entered automati-
cally. An automatic detection via the motor parameter identification is possible as well.
0 mohm 200000 330 mohm
C00085

C00085 | Motor stator leakage inductance Index: 24490d = 5FAAh
0.00 mH 650.00 0.00 mH
________________________________________________________________
C00087

C00087 | Rated motor speed Index: 24488d = 5FA8h
Note:
It is mandatory to give the rated motor speed for the sensorless vector control (SLVC).
50 rpm 9999 1460 rpm
C00088

C00088 | Rated motor current Index: 24487d = 5FA7h
0.00 A 99.00 21.00 A
C00089

C00089 | Rated motor frequency Index: 24486d = 5FA6h
Note:
It is mandatory to give the rated motor frequency for the sensorless vector control (SLVC).
10 Hz 1000 50 Hz
C00090

C00090 | Rated motor voltage Index: 24485d = 5FA5h
0 V 1000 400 V
________________________________________________________________
C00091

C00091 | Motor cosine phi Index: 24484d = 5FA4h
0.40 1.00 0.85
C00092

C00092 | Motor magnetising inductance Index: 24483d = 5FA3h
0.0 mH 6500.0 0.0 mH
C00093

C00093 | Power section identification Index: 24482d = 5FA2h
Display of the identification of the detected power section of the controller

0 65535
C00094

C00094 | Password Index: 24481d = 5FA1h
The controller provides the opportunity to protect the menu level from unauthorised access by assigning a pass-
word.
Password protection
0 9999 0
C00095

C00095 | Motor magnetising current Index: 24480d = 5FA0h
0.00 A 99.00
 Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100
________________________________________________________________
C00097

C00097 | Rated motor torque Index: 24478d = 5F9Eh
Display of the rated motor torque

• The value displayed here is calculated from different parameters, e.g. the maximum current set in C00022.
0.00 Nm 99.00
C00098

C00098 | Device rated current Index: 24477d = 5F9Dh
Display of the rated inverter current which is defined by the integrated power section.
0.0 A 999.0
C00099
Parameter | Name: Data type: VISIBLE_STRING

C00099 | Firmware version Index: 24476d = 5F9Ch
Display of the firmware version of the device as string

 Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT
C00100

C00100 | Firmware version Index: 24475d = 5F9Bh
Display of the firmware version of the device, divided into subsections.

0 99
Subcodes Info
C00100/1 Firmware version - main version
C00100/2 Firmware version - subversion
C00100/3 Firmware version - release
C00100/4 Firmware version - build
________________________________________________________________
C00105

C00105 | Deceleration time quick stop Index: 24470d = 5F96h
The set deceleration time determines the ramp slope at quick stop
• When the output frequency falls below the threshold set in C00019, the DC injection brake DCB is activated.
Note:
The S-ramp time set in C00182 is also active with quick stop!
In order to reach the required deceleration time for quick stop, set the time accordingly lower in this parameter.
0.0 s 999.9 5.0 s
C00106

C00106 | Auto DCB: Hold time Index: 24469d = 5F95h
Hold time of the automatic DC injection brake

• The DC injection brake is applied for the time set here if the value falls below the speed setpoint set in C00019.
0.0 s 999.0 0.5 s
C00107

C00107 | DCB: Hold time Index: 24468d = 5F94h
Maximum hold time of the manual DC injection brake

• In order not to overload the motor thermally, a time for automatic switch-off of the DC injection brake can be set
here.
0.0 s 999.0 999.0 s
________________________________________________________________
C00114

C00114 | DIx inversion Index: 24461d = 5F8Dh
Polarity of the digital inputs

• Every digital input of the device can be inverted with regard to polarity via this bit field.
Digital terminals
Setting range (min. hex value | max. hex value) Lenze setting
0x0000 0xFFFF 0x8000 (decimal: 32768)
Value is bit-coded: ( = bit set) Info
Bit 0  DI1 inverted Inversion of digital input 1
Bit 4  Reserved
Bit 5  Reserved
Bit 6  Reserved
Bit 7  Reserved
Bit 8  Reserved
Bit 9  Reserved
Bit 10  Reserved
Bit 11  Reserved
Bit 12  Reserved
Bit 13  Reserved
Bit 14  Reserved
Bit 15  RFR inverted Inversion of RFR digital input (controller enable)
 Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT
C00118

C00118 | DOx inversion Index: 24457d = 5F89h
Polarity of the digital outputs

• Every digital output of the device can be inverted with regard to polarity via this bit field.
0x00 0xFF 0x00 (decimal: 0)
Value is bit-coded: ( = bit set) Info
Bit 0  Relay inverted Relay inversion
Bit 1  DO1 inverted Inversion of digital output 1
Bit 2  Reserved
Bit 3  Reserved
Bit 4  Reserved
Bit 5  Reserved
Bit 6  Reserved
Bit 7  Reserved
________________________________________________________________
C00120

C00120 | Motor overload threshold (I²xt) Index: 24455d = 5F87h
Operating threshold for the error message "OC6: Motor overload (I²xt)"
• The response for reaching the threshold can be selected in C00606.
• The current thermal motor load is displayed in C00066.
Motor overload monitoring (I2xt)
0 % 250 100 %
C00122

C00122 | Initial value motor overload (I²xt) Index: 24453d = 5F85h
From version 03.04.00

The thermal motor load displayed in C00066 is pre-initialised with the value set here when the device is connected
to the mains.
• If "100.00 %" is set, the last value at switching off the device is used for the initialisation.
• Recommended setting for operation according to UL: 50.00 %
Motor overload monitoring (I2xt)
0.00 % 100.00
C00122/1 0.00 % Initial value motor overload (I²xt)
C00123

C00123 | Device utilisation threshold (Ixt) Index: 24452d = 5F84h
Operating threshold for the error message "OC5: Device overload (Ixt)"
• The response for reaching the threshold can be selected in C00604.
• The current device utilisation is displayed in C00064.
0 % 100 100 %
C00134

C00134 | Ramp smoothing, main setpoint Index: 24441d = 5F79h
FB L_NSet_1: Configuration of the ramp smoothing for the main setpoint

0 Off Ramp rounding deactivated
1 PT1 behaviour Ramp rounding with PT1 behaviour
• The corresponding S-ramp time must be set in
C00182.
________________________________________________________________
C00137

C00137 | Device state Index: 24438d = 5F76h
Display of the current device state

Selection list (read only)
0 Reserved
1 Init
2 MotorIdent
3 ReadyToSwitchON
4 SwitchedON
5 OperationEnable
6 Reserved
7 Trouble
8 Fault
9 Reserved
10 SafeTorqueOff
11 Reserved
12 Reserved
13 Reserved
14 Reserved
15 Reserved
C00141

C00141 | Device settings Index: 24434d = 5F72h
Selection list
0 Inactive
1 Active
C00141/1 0: Inactive Always save parameters
• When this function is activated, every parameter
change is saved in the memory module. A manual sa-
ving of parameter sets is not required anymore.
Note:
Activating this function is not permissible if parameters
are changed very frequently (e.g. in case of cyclic writing
of parameters via a bus system).
________________________________________________________________
C00142

C00142 | Auto-start option Index: 24433d = 5F71h
Starting performance of the controller after mains connection and reset of "Trouble" or "Fault".
"Inhibit at power-on" auto-start option
0x00 0xFF 0x01 (decimal: 1)
Value is bit-coded: ( = bit set)
Bit 0  Inhibit at mains ON
Bit 1  Inhibit at trouble
Bit 2  Inhibit at fault
Bit 3  Reserved
Bit 4  Reserved
Bit 5  Reserved
Bit 6  Reserved
Bit 7  Reserved
C00144

C00144 | Switching frequency reduction (temp.) Index: 24431d = 5F6Fh
Activation of the automatic switching frequency reduction at too high temperature

0 Off Automatic switching frequency reduction deactivated
1 On Automatic switching frequency reduction activated
________________________________________________________________
C00150

C00150 | Status word Index: 24425d = 5F69h
Bit-coded device status word

Display area (min. hex value | max. hex value)
0x0000 0xFFFF
Value is bit-coded: Info
Bit 0 FreeStatusBit0 Free status bit 0
Bit 1 PowerDisabled Power switched off
Bit 6 ActSpeedIsZero Current speed is 0
Bit 7 ControllerInhibit Controller is inhibited
Bit 8 StatusCodeBit0 Status code bit 0
Bit 12 Warning Warning
Bit 13 Trouble Fault
________________________________________________________________
C00155

C00155 | Status word 2 Index: 24420d = 5F64h
Bit-coded device status word 2

0x0000 0xFFFF
Bit 0 Fail Error
Bit 1 M_max Maximum torque
Bit 2 I_max Maximum current
Bit 3 PowerDisabled Power switched off
Bit 4 Ready Controller is ready for operation
Bit 5 ControllerInhibit Controller is inhibited
Bit 6 Trouble Fault
Bit 7 InitState Initialisation
Bit 8 CwCcw CW/CCW rotation
Bit 9 Reserved
Bit 10 SafeTorqueOff Safe torque off
Bit 11 Reserved
Bit 12 Reserved
Bit 13 Reserved
Bit 14 Quick stop Quick stop is active
Bit 15 MotorIdent Motor parameter identification active
________________________________________________________________
C00158

C00158 | Cause for controller inhibit Index: 24417d = 5F61h
Bit-coded display of the cause/source of controller inhibit

0x0000 0xFFFF
Value is bit-coded:
Bit 0 Terminal controller enable
Bit 1 Reserved
Bit 2 Reserved
Bit 3 Reserved
Bit 4 Application
Bit 5 Device command
Bit 6 Error response
Bit 7 Reserved
Bit 8 Reserved
Bit 9 Reserved
Bit 10 AutoStartLock
Bit 11 Motor parameter identification
Bit 12 Reserved
Bit 13 DCB-IMP
Bit 14 Reserved
Bit 15 Reserved
________________________________________________________________
C00159

C00159 | Cause for quick stop QSP Index: 24416d = 5F60h
Bit-coded display of the cause/source of quick stop

0x0000 0xFFFF
Value is bit-coded:
Bit 0 Terminal
Bit 1 Reserved
Bit 2 Reserved
Bit 3 Reserved
Bit 4 Application
Bit 5 Device command
Bit 6 Reserved
Bit 7 Reserved
Bit 8 Reserved
Bit 9 Reserved
Bit 10 Reserved
Bit 11 Reserved
Bit 12 Reserved
Bit 13 Reserved
Bit 14 Reserved
Bit 15 Reserved
C00165

C00165 | Error information Index: 24410d = 5F5Ah
Display of the error numbers divided into sectors in the case of an error
Subcodes Info
C00165/1 Current error
C00166

C00166 | Error information text Index: 24409d = 5F59h
Display of details of the currently pending error

Subcodes Info
C00166/1 Resp. - current error
• Response of the currently pending error
C00166/2 Subj.area curr. error
• Subject area of the currently pending error
C00166/3 Mess.curr.error
• Textual message of the currently pending error
________________________________________________________________
C00167
Parameter | Name: Data type: OCTET_STRING

C00167 | Logbook data Index: 24408d = 5F58h
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00168

C00168 | Error number Index: 24407d = 5F57h

0 4294967295
Subcodes Info
C00168/1 Display of the internal error number for the last 8 occur-
red errors
C00168/...
C00168/8
C00169

C00169 | Time of error Index: 24406d = 5F56h

0 4294967295
Subcodes Info
C00169/1 Display of the time of error for the last 8 occurred errors
C00169/...
C00169/8
C00170

C00170 | Error counter Index: 24405d = 5F55h

0 255
Subcodes Info
C00170/1 Display of the error counter for the last 8 occurred errors
C00170/...
C00170/8
C00171

C00171 | Logbook access index Index: 24404d = 5F54h
________________________________________________________________
C00173

C00173 | Mains voltage Index: 24402d = 5F52h
Selection of the mains voltage for operating the device.

0 3ph 400V / 1ph 230V 3-phase 400 V or 1-phase 230 V
 Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00174

C00174 | Reduced brake chopper threshold Index: 24401d = 5F51h
The threshold from which on the brake chopper is controlled is reduced by the voltage value set here.
0 V 150 0 V
C00177

C00177 | Switching cycles Index: 24398d = 5F4Eh
Counter of different switching cycles and stressful situations

0 2147483647
Subcodes Info
C00177/1 Number of mains switching cycles
C00177/2 Number of switching cycles of the output relay
C00178

C00178 | Elapsed-hour meter Index: 24397d = 5F4Dh
Display of the operating hours in "seconds" unit

0 s 2147483647
C00179

C00179 | Power-on time meter Index: 24396d = 5F4Ch
Display of the power-on time in "seconds" unit

0 s 2147483647
________________________________________________________________
C00182

C00182 | S-ramp time PT1 Index: 24393d = 5F49h
FB L_NSet_1: PT1 S-ramp time for the main setpoint ramp function generator
• Only effective with activated ramp smoothing (C00134 = "1").
0.01 s 50.00 20.00 s
C00200

C00200 | Firmware product type Index: 24375d = 5F37h
Display of the firmware product type

C00201

C00201 | Firmware compile date Index: 24374d = 5F36h
Display of the firmware compilation date

C00203

C00203 | Product type code Index: 24372d = 5F34h
Display of the single device component types
Subcodes Info
C00203/1 Reserved
C00203/2 Reserved
C00203/3 Reserved
C00203/4 Type: I/O micro
C00203/5 Type: Memory module
C00203/6 Type: Safety module
C00203/7 Reserved
C00203/8 Type: Complete device
C00203/9 Reserved
C00222

C00222 | L_PCTRL_1: Vp Index: 24353d = 5F21h
FB L_PCTRL_1: Gain factor Vp for the PID process controller
0.1 500.0 1.0
________________________________________________________________
C00223

C00223 | L_PCTRL_1: Tn Index: 24352d = 5F20h
FB L_PCTRL_1: Reset time Tn for the PID process controller
20 ms 6000 400 ms
C00224

C00224 | L_PCTRL_1: Kd Index: 24351d = 5F1Fh
FB L_PCTRL_1: Derivative-action coefficient Kd for the PID process controller
0.0 5.0 0.0
C00225

C00225 | L_PCTRL_1: MaxLimit Index: 24350d = 5F1Eh
FB L_PCTRL_1: Maximum output value of the PID process controller
-199.9 % 199.9 199.9 %
C00226

C00226 | L_PCTRL_1: MinLimit Index: 24349d = 5F1Dh
FB L_PCTRL_1: Minimum output value of the PID process controller
-199.9 % 199.9 -199.9 %
C00227

C00227 | L_PCTRL_1: Acceleration time Index: 24348d = 5F1Ch
FB L_PCTRL_1: Acceleration time for the output value of the PID process controller
0.0 s 999.9 0.1 s
________________________________________________________________
C00228

C00228 | L_PCTRL_1: Deceleration time Index: 24347d = 5F1Bh
FB L_PCTRL_1: Deceleration time for the output value of the PID process controller
0.0 s 999.9 0.1 s
C00231

C00231 | L_PCTRL_1: Operating range Index: 24344d = 5F18h
FB L_PCTRL_1: Operating range for the PID process controller
0.0 % 199.9
C00231/1 199.9 % L_PCTRL_1: Pos. maximum
C00231/2 0.0 % L_PCTRL_1: Pos. minimum
C00231/3 0.0 % L_PCTRL_1: Neg. minimum
C00231/4 199.9 % L_PCTRL_1: Neg. maximum
C00234

C00234 | Oscillation damping influence Index: 24341d = 5F15h
Oscillation damping
0 % 250 5 %
C00235

C00235 | Filter time - oscill. damping Index: 24340d = 5F14h
C00236

C00236 | Oscillation damping - field weakening Index: 24339d = 5F13h
________________________________________________________________
C00242

C00242 | L_PCTRL_1: Operating mode Index: 24333d = 5F0Dh
FB L_PCTRL_1: Selection of the operating mode
• Depending on the selection, the blue switches in the displayed signal flow are set accordingly in the Engineer on
the Application parameter tab in the Overview  Signal flow  Process controller dialog level.
0 Off The input setpoint nNSet_a is output without any chan-
ges at the output nOut_a.
1 Additive + feedforward control nNSet_a and nAct_a are used as PID input values. The ar-
riving nNSet_a is additively linked to the value output by
the PID element.
2 PID as setpoint generator. nSet_a and nAct_a are used as PID input values. The in-
put nNSet_a is not considered.
3 PID setpoint from L_NSet_1 nNSet_a and nAct_a are used as PID input values. The in-
put nSet_a is not considered.
C00243

C00243 | L_PCTRL_1: Acceleration time influence Index: 24332d = 5F0Ch
FB L_PCTRL_1: Acceleration time for showing the PID output value
0.0 s 999.9 5.0 s
C00244

C00244 | L_PCTRL_1: Deceleration time influence Index: 24331d = 5F0Bh
FB L_PCTRL_1: Deceleration time for masking out the PID output value
0.0 s 999.9 5.0 s
C00245

C00245 | L_PCTRL_1: PID output value Index: 24330d = 5F0Ah
FB L_PCTRL_1: Display of the output value of the PID process controller
-199.9 % 199.9
________________________________________________________________
C00308

C00308 | Activation of internal features Index: 24267d = 5ECBh
C00309

C00309 | Delay time Index: 24266d = 5ECAh
C00443

C00443 | DIx: Level Index: 24132d = 5E44h
Bit-coded display of the level of the digital inputs

0x0000 0xFFFF
Bit 0 DI1 Bit set = HIGH level
Bit 1 DI2
Bit 2 DI3
Bit 3 DI4
Bit 4 Reserved
Bit 5 Reserved
Bit 6 Reserved
Bit 7 Reserved
Bit 8 Reserved
Bit 9 Reserved
Bit 10 Reserved
Bit 11 Reserved
Bit 12 Reserved
Bit 13 Reserved
Bit 14 Reserved
Bit 15 CINH
Subcodes Info
C00443/1 DIx: Terminal level
C00443/2 DIx: Output level
________________________________________________________________
C00444

C00444 | DOx: Level Index: 24131d = 5E43h
Bit-coded display of the level of the digital outputs

0x0000 0xFFFF
Bit 0 Relay Bit set = HIGH level
Bit 1 DO1
Bit 2 Reserved
Bit 3 Reserved
Bit 4 Reserved
Bit 5 Reserved
Bit 6 Reserved
Bit 7 Reserved
Bit 8 Reserved
Bit 9 Reserved
Bit 10 Reserved
Bit 11 Reserved
Bit 12 Reserved
Bit 13 Reserved
Bit 14 Reserved
Bit 15 Reserved
Subcodes Info
C00444/1 DOx: Input level
C00444/2 DOx: Terminal level
C00462

C00462 | Keypad/PC: Setpoint control Index: 24113d = 5E31h
C00470

C00470 | LS_ParFree_b Index: 24105d = 5E29h
SB LS_ParFree_b: Setting of the signal level to be output

Selection list
0 False
1 True
C00470/1 0: False Signal level for output bPar1 ... bPar16
C00470/...
C00470/16
________________________________________________________________
C00472

C00472 | LS_ParFree_a Index: 24103d = 5E27h
SB LS_ParFree_a: Setting of the analog signals to be output

-199.9 % 199.9
C00472/1 0.0 % Value for output nPar1_a
C00480

C00480 | LS_DisFree_b Index: 24095d = 5E1Fh
SB LS_DisFree_b: Display of the input values

0x00 0xFF
Bit 0 bDis1 Signal level input bDis1 ... bDis8
... ...
Bit 7 bDis8
 Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT
C00481

C00481 | LS_DisFree Index: 24094d = 5E1Eh
SB LS_DisFree: Display of the input values

0x0000 0xFFFF
Value is bit-coded:
Bit 0 Bit0
... ...
Bit 15 Bit15
Subcodes Info
C00481/1 Input values wDis1 ... wDis4
C00481/...
C00481/4
 Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT
________________________________________________________________
C00482

C00482 | LS_DisFree_a Index: 24093d = 5E1Dh
SB LS_DisFree_a: Display of the input values

-199.9 % 199.9
Subcodes Info
C00482/1 Input values nDis1_a ... nDis4_a
C00482/...
C00482/4
C00516

C00516 | Checksums Index: 24059d = 5DFBh

0 255
Subcodes Info
C00516/1 Checksum of interconnection
________________________________________________________________
C00517

C00517 | User menu Index: 24058d = 5DFAh
When a system is installed, parameters must be changed time and again until the system runs satisfactorily. The
user menu of a device serves to create a selection of frequently used parameters to be able to access and change
these parameters quickly.
• For setting "0" no entry is displayed in the user menu.
0 994
C00517/1 51 C00051: Display of actual speed value
C00517/2 53 C00053: Display of DC-bus voltage
C00517/3 54 C00054: Display of motor current
C00517/4 61 C00061: Display of heatsink temperature
C00517/5 137 C00137: Display of device state
C00517/6 0 User menu: entry 6
C00517/8 11 C00011: Reference speed
C00517/9 39 C00039/1: Fixed setpoint 1
C00039/2: Fixed setpoint 2
C00039/3: Fixed setpoint 3
C00517/11 12 C00012: Acceleration time main setpoint
C00517/12 13 C00013: Deceleration time main setpoint
C00517/13 15 C00015: V/f base frequency
C00517/14 16 C00016: Vmin boost
C00517/15 22 C00022: Imax in motor mode
C00517/16 120 C00120: Motor overload threshold (I2xt)
C00517/17 87 C00087: Rated motor speed
C00517/18 99 C00099: Display of firmware version
C00565

C00565 | Resp. to mains phase failure Index: 24010d = 5DCAh
Response to the failure of mains phases

0 No Reaction
1 Fault
4 WarningLocked
________________________________________________________________
C00574

C00574 | Resp. to brake resist. overtemp. Index: 24001d = 5DC1h
Response when the permanently set threshold for monitoring the brake resistor utilisation has been reached.
0 No Reaction
1 Fault
4 WarningLocked
C00581

C00581 | Resp. to LS_SetError_x Index: 23994d = 5DBAh
Selection of the error responses for application error messages

• An application error message is tripped by a FALSE-TRUE edge at the binary inputs bSetError1...2.
Selection list
0 No Reaction
1 Fault
2 Trouble
4 WarningLocked
C00581/1 1: Fault LS_SetError_1: Resp. bSetError1
C00581/2 1: Fault LS_SetError_1: Resp. bSetError2
C00598

C00598 | Resp. to open circuit AINx Index: 23977d = 5DA9h
Configuration of monitoring the analog input

Analog terminals
Selection list
0 No Reaction
1 Fault
2 Trouble
4 WarningLocked
C00598/1 1: Fault Response to open circuit at AIN1 when being configured
as 4 ... 20 mA-current loop
________________________________________________________________
C00600

C00600 | Resp. to DC bus undervoltage Index: 23975d = 5DA7h
Configuration of monitoring of the motor control (group 3)

Selection list
1 Fault
2 Trouble
C00600/1 2: Trouble Response to undervoltage in the DC bus
C00601

C00601 | Del. resp.to fault: DC bus overvoltage Index: 23974d = 5DA6h
Delay times for error responses

0.00 s 65.00
C00601/1 2.00 s Delay time for error activation "DC-bus overvoltage"
• In case of DC-bus overvoltage, an error is only trans-
mitted after this delay time has elapsed.
C00604

C00604 | Resp. to device overload (Ixt) Index: 23971d = 5DA3h
Response if the adjustable device utilisation threshold (C00123) is reached.

• The current device utilisation is displayed in C00064.
0 No Reaction
1 Fault
4 WarningLocked
C00606

C00606 | Resp. to motor overload (I²xt) Index: 23969d = 5DA1h
Response if the adjustable motor overload threshold (C00120) is reached.

• The current thermal motor load is displayed in C00066.
0 No Reaction
1 Fault
4 WarningLocked
________________________________________________________________
C00620

C00620 | 16-bit system connection Index: 23955d = 5D93h
Connection parameters: 16-bit inputs

• Selection of the 16-bit output signals for connection with the 16-bit input signals.
• The selection list contains all 16-bit output signals which can be assigned to the 16-bit inputs mapped by the
subcodes.
Selection list
See selection list - analog signals
C00620/1 0: Not connected Reserved
C00620/5 0: Not connected LS_DisFree:wDis1
C00620/9 0: Not connected LS_DisFree_a:nDis1_a
________________________________________________________________
C00621

C00621 | Bool system connection Index: 23954d = 5D92h
Connection parameters: Binary inputs

• Selection of the binary output signals for connection with the binary input signals.
• The selection list contains all binary output signals which can be assigned to the binary inputs mapped by the
subcodes.
Selection list
See selection list - digital signals
C00621/1 50: LA_NCtrl_bDriveFail LS_DigitalOutput:bRelay
C00621/2 51: LA_NCtrl_bDriveReady LS_DigitalOutput:bOut1
C00621/6 64: LA_NCtrl_bNActCompare USER LED
C00621/7 0: Not connected LA_NCtrl: bStatusBit0
C00621/8 65: LA_NCtrl_bImaxActive LA_NCtrl: bStatusBit2
C00621/9 62: LA_NCtrl_bSpeedSetReached LA_NCtrl: bStatusBit3
C00621/10 63: LA_NCtrl_bSpeedActEqSet LA_NCtrl: bStatusBit4
C00621/11 64: LA_NCtrl_bNActCompare LA_NCtrl: bStatusBit5
C00621/12 60: LA_NCtrl_bSpeedCcw LA_NCtrl: bStatusBit14
C00621/13 51: LA_NCtrl_bDriveReady LA_NCtrl: bStatusBit15
C00621/16 0: Not connected LS_DisFree_b: bDis1
________________________________________________________________
C00700

C00700 | LA_NCtrl: Analog connection list Index: 23875d = 5D43h
Connection parameters for "Actuating drive speed" application: 16-bit inputs

• Selection of the 16-bit output signals for connection with the 16-bit input signals
• The selection list contains all 16-bit output signals which can be assigned to the 16-bit inputs mapped by the
subcodes.
Selection list
See selection list - analog signals
C00700/1 10: AIn1_Out LA_NCtrl: nMainSetValue_a
C00700/2 22: nPar3_a LA_NCtrl: nTorqueMotLim_a
C00700/3 22: nPar3_a LA_NCtrl: nTorqueGenLim_a
C00700/6 1: C_nPos100_a(100.0%) LA_NCtrl: nPIDVpAdapt_a
C00700/7 0: Not connected LA_NCtrl: nPIDActValue_a
C00700/8 1: C_nPos100_a(100.0%) LA_NCtrl: nPIDInfluence_a
C00700/9 0: Not connected LA_NCtrl: nPIDSetValue_a
________________________________________________________________
C00701

C00701 | LA_NCtrl: digital connection list Index: 23874d = 5D42h
Connection parameters for "Actuating drive speed" application: Binary inputs

• Selection of the binary output signals for connection with the binary input signals
• The selection list contains all binary output signals which can be assigned to the binary inputs mapped by the
subcodes.
Selection list
See selection list - digital signals
C00701/1 0: Not connected LA_NCtrl: bCInh
C00701/2 15: DigIn_CInh LA_NCtrl: bFailReset
C00701/3 0: Not connected LA_NCtrl: bSetQuickstop
C00701/4 13: DigIn_bIn3 LA_NCtrl: bSetDCBrake
C00701/5 14: DigIn_bIn4 LA_NCtrl: bSetSpeedCcw
C00701/6 11: DigIn_bIn1 LA_NCtrl: bJogSpeed1
C00701/7 12: DigIn_bIn2 LA_NCtrl: bJogSpeed2
C00701/8 0: Not connected LA_NCtrl: bMPotUp
C00701/9 0: Not connected LA_NCtrl: bMPotDown
C00701/10 0: Not connected LA_NCtrl: bMPotInAct
C00701/11 0: Not connected LA_NCtrl: bMPotEnable
C00701/12 0: Not connected LA_NCtrl: bRFG_0
C00701/13 0: Not connected LA_NCtrl: bSetError1
C00701/14 0: Not connected LA_NCtrl: bSetError2
C00701/15 1: C_bTrue LA_NCtrl: bPIDInfluenceRamp
C00701/16 0: Not connected LA_NCtrl: bPIDIOff
C00701/17 1: C_bTrue LA_NCtrl: bRLQCw
C00701/18 0: Not connected LA_NCtrl: bRLQCcw
C00725

C00725 | Current switching frequency Index: 23850d = 5D2Ah
Display of the current switching frequency
• When a variable switching frequency is selected in C00018, the switching frequency may change as a function
of the load and rotational frequency.
Selection list (read only)
________________________________________________________________
C00727

C00727 | LS_Keypad: Digital values Index: 23848d = 5D28h
Executing control commands when operating via keypad

0 1
C00727/1 0 "1" ≡ request quick stop
C00727/2 0 "1" ≡ request DC-injection braking
C00727/3 0 "1" ≡ request change of direction of rotation
C00727/4 0 "1" ≡ request fixed speed setpoint 1
C00727/5 0 "1" ≡ request fixed speed setpoint 2
 Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00728

C00728 | LS_Keypad: Keypad analog values Index: 23847d = 5D27h
Selection of different setpoints when operating via keypad

-199.9 % 199.9
C00728/1 100.0 % Torque limit in motor mode
C00728/2 100.0 % Torque limit in generator mode
C00728/3 0.0 % Setpoint speed
C00729

C00729 | Keypad/PC: Speed setpoint Index: 23846d = 5D26h
C00800

C00800 | L_MPot_1: Upper limit Index: 23775d = 5CDFh
FB L_MPot_1: Upper limit of the motor potentiometer function

-199.9 % 199.9 100.0 %
C00801

C00801 | L_MPot_1: Lower limit Index: 23774d = 5CDEh
FB L_MPot_1: Lower limit of the motor potentiometer function

-199.9 % 199.9 -100.0 %
________________________________________________________________
C00802

C00802 | L_MPot_1: Acceleration time Index: 23773d = 5CDDh
FB L_MPot_1: Acceleration time of the motor potentiometer function

0.1 s 999.9 10.0 s
C00803

C00803 | L_MPot_1: Deceleration time Index: 23772d = 5CDCh
FB L_MPot_1: Deceleration time of the motor potentiometer function

0.1 s 999.9 10.0 s
C00804

C00804 | L_MPot_1: Inactive fct. Index: 23771d = 5CDBh
FB L_MPot_1: Selection of the response when deactivating the motor potentiometer via the bInAct input
0 Keep value Keep output value
1 Deceleration to 0 Deceleration via ramp to 0
2 Deceleration to lower limit Deceleration via ramp to lower limit (C00801)
3 Without ramp to 0 Jump to 0
4 Without ramp to lower limit Jump to lower limit (C00800)
5 Acceleration to upper limit Acceleration via ramp to upper limit (C00800)
C00805

C00805 | L_MPot_1: Init fct. Index: 23770d = 5CDAh
FB L_MPot_1: Selection of the response when switching on the device

0 Load last value
1 Load lower limit
2 Load 0
________________________________________________________________
C00806

C00806 | L_MPot_1: Use Index: 23769d = 5CD9h
FB L_MPot_1: Use of the motor potentiometer

0 No The motor potentiometer is not used.
• The analog value applied to the nIn_a input is looped
through without any changes to the nOut_a output.
1 Yes The motor potentiometer is used.
• The analog value applied at the nIn_a input is led via
the motor potentiometer and provided at the nOut_a
output.
C00830

C00830 | 16-bit analogue input Index: 23745d = 5CC1h
Display in percent of 16-bit input values of different blocks

-199.9 % 199.9
Subcodes Info
C00830/1 L_NSet_1: nNSet_a
C00830/2 L_NSet_1: nOut_a
C00830/3 LS_MCTRL: nSpeedSetValue_a
C00830/4 LS_MCTRL: nTorqueMotLimit_a
C00830/5 LS_MCTRL: nTorqueGenLimit_a
C00830/6 L_PCTRL_1: nAct_a
C00830/7 L_PCTRL_1: nAdapt_a
C00830/8 L_PCTRL_1: nSet_a
C00830/9 L_PCTRL_1: nInflu_a
C00830/10 L_PCTRL_1: nNSet_a
C00830/11 L_MPot_1: nIn_a
C00831

C00831 | 16-bit common input Index: 23744d = 5CC0h
Decimal/hexadecimal/bit-coded display of 16-bit input values of different blocks
0x0000 0xFFFF
Value is bit-coded:
Bit 0 Bit0
... ...
Bit 15 Bit15
Subcodes Info
C00831/1 LS_DCTRL: wCANControl
________________________________________________________________
C00833

C00833 | 8-bit input Index: 23742d = 5CBEh
Display of the signal status of the binary inputs of different blocks
Selection list
0 False
1 True
Subcodes Info
C00833/1 L_NSet_1: bRfg0
C00833/2 L_NSet_1: bNSetInv
C00833/3 L_NSet_1: bJog1
C00833/4 L_NSet_1: bJog2
C00833/5 LS_SetError_1: bSetError1
C00833/6 LS_SetError_1: bSetError2
C00833/7 L_MPot_1: bUp
C00833/8 L_MPot_1: bInAct
C00833/9 L_MPot_1: bDown
C00833/10 L_MPot_1: bEnable
C00833/11 Reserved
C00833/12 L_PCTRL_1: bIOff
C00833/13 L_PCTRL_1: bEnableInfluenceRamp
C00833/14 LS_DCTRL: bCINH
C00833/15 LS_DCTRL: bFailReset
C00833/16 LS_DCTRL: bStatus_B0
C00833/23 L_RLQ_1: bCw
C00833/24 L_RLQ_1: bCcw
C00909

C00909 | Speed limitation Index: 23666d = 5C72h
Maximum positive/negative speed for all operating modes

0.0 % 175.0
C00909/1 120.0 % Max. pos. speed
C00909/2 120.0 % Max. neg. speed
________________________________________________________________
C00910

C00910 | Frequency limitation Index: 23665d = 5C71h
Maximum positive/negative output frequency for all operating modes

0 Hz 300
C00910/1 300 Hz Max. pos. output frequency
C00910/2 300 Hz Max. neg. output frequency
C00990

C00990 | Flying restart fct.: Activation Index: 23585d = 5C21h
Switch on /activate flying restart circuit for non-feedback drive systems

Flying restart function
0 Off
1 On
C00991

C00991 | Flying restart fct.: Process Index: 23584d = 5C20h
Selection of the speed search range for flying restart function

5 -n...+n | Last output frequency
6 -n...+n | Actual setpoint frequency
C00992

C00992 | Flying restart: Start frequency Index: 23583d = 5C1Fh
Selection of the starting value for the flying restart function

-200 Hz 200 10 Hz
________________________________________________________________
C00994

C00994 - Flying restart fct.: Current Index: 23581d = 5C1Dh
Current to be injected during the flying restart process

• 100 % ≡ rated motor current (C00081).
• The flying restart current should amount to 10 ... 25 % of the rated motor current.
0.0 % 100.0 25.0 %
9.2 Parameter list
________________________________________________________________
9.2.1 Selection lists for configuration parameters
9.2.1.1 Selection list - analog signals

This selection list is relevant for the following parameters:
Parameter
C00620 16-bit system connection
C00700 LA_NCtrl: Analog connection list
Selection list - analog signals

0 Not connected
1 C_nPos100_a(100.0%)
2 C_nNeg100_a(-100.0%)
3 C_nPos199_9_a(199.9%)
4 C_nNeg199_9_a(-199.9%)
5 C_w65535
6 C_wDriveCtrl
10 AIn1_Out
20 nPar1_a
21 nPar2_a
22 nPar3_a
23 nPar4_a
24 LS_Keypad_nTorqueMotLim_a
25 LS_Keypad_nTorqueGenLim_a
26 LS_Keypad_nMainSetValue_a
50 LA_NCtrl_nMotorFreqAct_a
51 LA_NCtrl_nMotorSpeedSet_a
52 LA_NCtrl_nMotorSpeedAct_a
53 LA_NCtrl_nMotor Voltage_a
54 LA_NCtrl_nDCVoltage_a
55 LA_NCtrl_nMotorCurrent_a
56 LA_NCtrl_nMotorTorqueAct_a
57 LA_NCtrl_nHeatsinktemperature_a
58 LA_NCtrl_nOutputSpeedCtrl_a
70 LA_NCtrl_wDeviceStateWord
71 LA_NCtrl_wDeviceAuxStateWord
72 LA_NCtrl_wDetermFailNoLow
73 LA_NCtrl_wDetermFailNoHigh
9.2 Parameter list
________________________________________________________________
9.2.1.2 Selection list - digital signals

This selection list is relevant for the following parameters:
Parameter
C00621 Bool system connection
C00701 LA_NCtrl: Digital connection list
Selection list - digital signals

0 Not connected
1 C_bTrue
11 DigIn_bIn1
12 DigIn_bIn2
13 DigIn_bIn3
14 DigIn_bIn4
15 DigIn_CInh
20 bPar1
21 bPar2
22 bPar3
23 bPar4
24 bPar5
25 bPar6
26 bPar7
27 bPar8
28 bPar9
29 bPar10
30 bPar11
31 bPar12
32 bPar13
33 bPar14
34 bPar15
35 bPar16
36 LS_Keypad_bSetQuickstop
37 LS_Keypad_bSetDCBrake
38 LS_Keypad_bSetSpeedCcw
39 LS_Keypad_bJogSpeed1
40 LS_Keypad_bJogSpeed2
50 LA_NCtrl_bDriveFail
51 LA_NCtrl_bDriveReady
52 LA_NCtrl_bCInhActive
53 LA_NCtrl_bQSPIsActive
54 LA_NCtrl_bSafeTorqueOff
60 LA_NCtrl_bSpeedCcw
61 LA_NCtrl_bActSpeedEqZero
62 LA_NCtrl_bSpeedSetReached
63 LA_NCtrl_bSpeedActEqSet
64 LA_NCtrl_bNActCompare
65 LA_NCtrl_bImaxActive
66 LA_NCtrl_bHeatSinkWarning
67 LA_NCtrl_bOVDetected
68 LA_NCtrl_bDCBrakeOn
69 LA_NCtrl_bFlyingSyncActive
70 Ain_bCurrentErrorIn1
9.3 Table of attributes
________________________________________________________________
The table of attributes contains information that is required for a communication to the controller
via parameters.
How to read the table of attributes:
Column Meaning Entry

Code Parameter name Cxxxxx
Name Parameter short text (display text) Text
Index dec Index under which the parameter is addressed. 24575 - Lenze code number Is only required for access via a bus sys-
The subindex of array variables corresponds to the tem.
hex Lenze subcode number. 5FFFh - Lenze code number
Data DS Data structure E Single variable

(only one parameter element)
A Array variable
(several parameter elements)
DA Number of array elements (subcodes) Number
DT Data type INTEGER_16 2 bytes with sign
INTEGER_32 4 bytes with sign
UNSIGNED_8 1 byte without sign
UNSIGNED_16 2 bytes without sign
UNSIGNED_32 4 bytes without sign
VISIBLE_STRING ASCII string
Factor Factor for data transfer via a bus system, depen- Factor 1 ≡ no decimal positions
ding on the number of decimal positions 10 ≡ 1 decimal position
100 ≡ 2 decimal positions
1000 ≡ 3 decimal positions
Access R Read access  Reading permitted
W Write access  Writing permitted
CINH Controller inhibit required  Writing is only possible when the controller is inhibited
Code Name Index Data Access

dec hex DS DA DT Factor R W CINH
C00002 Device commands 24573 5FFD A 32 UNSIGNED_8 1  
C00003 Status of last device command 24572 5FFC E 1 UNSIGNED_8 1 
C00006 Motor control 24569 5FF9 E 1 UNSIGNED_8 1  
C00007 Control mode 24568 5FF8 E 1 UNSIGNED_16 1  
C00010 Minimum analog setpoint 24565 5FF5 A 1 INTEGER_16 100  
C00011 Appl.: Reference speed 24564 5FF4 E 1 UNSIGNED_16 1  
C00012 Accel. time - main setpoint 24563 5FF3 E 1 UNSIGNED_32 1000  
C00013 Decel. time - main setpoint 24562 5FF2 E 1 UNSIGNED_32 1000  
C00015 VFC: V/f base frequency 24560 5FF0 E 1 UNSIGNED_16 10  
C00016 VFC: Vmin boost 24559 5FEF E 1 UNSIGNED_16 100  
C00018 Switching frequency 24557 5FED E 1 UNSIGNED_8 1  
C00019 Auto-DCB: Threshold 24556 5FEC E 1 UNSIGNED_16 1  
C00021 Slip comp. 24554 5FEA E 1 INTEGER_16 100  
C00022 Imax in motor mode 24553 5FE9 E 1 UNSIGNED_16 100  
C00023 Imax in generator mode 24552 5FE8 E 1 INTEGER_16 100  
C00024 Comparison value N_Act 24551 5FE7 E 1 INTEGER_16 100  
C00026 AINx: Offset 24549 5FE5 A 1 INTEGER_16 100  
C00027 AINx: Gain 24548 5FE4 A 1 INTEGER_32 100  
C00028 AINx: Input voltage 24547 5FE3 A 1 INTEGER_16 100 
C00029 AINx: Input current 24546 5FE2 A 1 INTEGER_16 100 
C00033 AINx: Output value 24542 5FDE A 1 INTEGER_16 100 
C00034 AINx: Configuration 24541 5FDD A 1 UNSIGNED_8 1  
________________________________________________________________

C00036 DCB: Current 24539 5FDB E 1 INTEGER_16 100  
C00039 Fixed setpoint x (L_NSet_1 n-Fix) 24536 5FD8 A 3 INTEGER_16 100  
C00050 MCTRL: Speed setpoint 24525 5FCD E 1 INTEGER_32 1 
C00051 MCTRL: Actual speed value 24524 5FCC E 1 INTEGER_32 1 
C00052 Motor voltage 24523 5FCB E 1 UNSIGNED_16 1 
C00053 DC-bus voltage 24522 5FCA E 1 UNSIGNED_16 1 
C00054 Motor current 24521 5FC9 E 1 UNSIGNED_16 100 
C00056 Torque 24519 5FC7 A 2 INTEGER_32 100 
C00057 Maximum torque 24518 5FC6 E 1 UNSIGNED_32 100 
C00058 Output frequency 24517 5FC5 E 1 INTEGER_32 100 
C00059 Appl.: Reference frequency C11 24516 5FC4 E 1 UNSIGNED_32 100 
C00061 Heatsink temperature 24514 5FC2 E 1 INTEGER_16 1 
C00064 Device utilisation (Ixt) 24511 5FBF A 3 INTEGER_16 100 
C00066 Thermal motor load (I²xt) 24509 5FBD E 1 INTEGER_16 100 
C00073 Vp Imax controller 24502 5FB6 E 1 UNSIGNED_16 100  
C00074 Ti Imax controller 24501 5FB5 E 1 UNSIGNED_16 1  
C00081 Rated motor power 24494 5FAE E 1 UNSIGNED_16 100  
C00084 Motor stator resistance 24491 5FAB E 1 UNSIGNED_32 1  
C00085 Motor stator leakage inductance 24490 5FAA E 1 UNSIGNED_16 100  
C00087 Rated motor speed 24488 5FA8 E 1 UNSIGNED_16 1  
C00088 Rated motor current 24487 5FA7 E 1 UNSIGNED_16 100  
C00089 Rated motor frequency 24486 5FA6 E 1 UNSIGNED_16 1  
C00090 Rated motor voltage 24485 5FA5 E 1 UNSIGNED_16 1  
C00091 Motor cosine phi 24484 5FA4 E 1 UNSIGNED_8 100  
C00092 Motor magnetising inductance 24483 5FA3 E 1 UNSIGNED_16 10  
C00093 Power section identification 24482 5FA2 E 1 UNSIGNED_16 1 
C00094 Password 24481 5FA1 E 1 INTEGER_32 1  
C00095 Motor magnetising current 24480 5FA0 E 1 UNSIGNED_16 100 
C00097 Rated motor torque 24478 5F9E E 1 UNSIGNED_32 100 
C00098 Rated device current 24477 5F9D E 1 UNSIGNED_16 10 
C00099 Firmware version 24476 5F9C E 1 VISIBLE_STRING 
C00100 Firmware version 24475 5F9B A 4 UNSIGNED_8 1 
C00105 Deceleration time - quick stop 24470 5F96 E 1 UNSIGNED_32 1000  
C00106 Auto-DCB: Hold time 24469 5F95 E 1 UNSIGNED_32 1000  
C00107 DCB: Hold time 24468 5F94 E 1 UNSIGNED_32 1000  
C00114 DIx inversion 24461 5F8D E 1 UNSIGNED_16  
C00118 DOx inversion 24457 5F89 E 1 UNSIGNED_8  
C00120 Motor overload threshold (I²xt) 24455 5F87 E 1 INTEGER_16 100  
C00122 Initial value motor overload (I²xt) 24453 5F85 A 1 UNSIGNED_16 100  
C00123 Device utilisat. threshold (Ixt) 24452 5F84 E 1 INTEGER_16 100  
C00134 Ramp smoothing - main setpoint 24441 5F79 E 1 UNSIGNED_8 1  
C00137 Device state 24438 5F76 E 1 UNSIGNED_16 1 
C00141 Device settings 24434 5F72 A 1 UNSIGNED_8 1  
C00142 Auto-start option 24433 5F71 E 1 UNSIGNED_8  
C00144 Switching frequency reduction (temp.) 24431 5F6F E 1 UNSIGNED_8 1  
C00150 Status word 24425 5F69 E 1 UNSIGNED_16 
C00155 Status word 2 24420 5F64 E 1 UNSIGNED_16 
C00158 Cause of controller inhibit 24417 5F61 E 1 UNSIGNED_16 
C00159 Cause of quick stop QSP 24416 5F60 E 1 UNSIGNED_16 
C00165 Error information 24410 5F5A A 1 VISIBLE_STRING 
C00166 Error information text 24409 5F59 A 3 VISIBLE_STRING 
________________________________________________________________

C00168 Error number 24407 5F57 A 8 UNSIGNED_32 1 
C00169 Time of error 24406 5F56 A 8 UNSIGNED_32 1 
C00170 Error counter 24405 5F55 A 8 UNSIGNED_8 1 
C00173 Mains voltage 24402 5F52 E 1 UNSIGNED_8 1   
C00174 Reduced brake chopper threshold 24401 5F51 E 1 UNSIGNED_8 1  
C00177 Switching cycles 24398 5F4E A 2 UNSIGNED_32 1 
C00178 Elapsed-hour meter 24397 5F4D E 1 UNSIGNED_32 1 
C00179 Power-on time meter 24396 5F4C E 1 UNSIGNED_32 1 
C00182 S-ramp time PT1 24393 5F49 E 1 INTEGER_16 100  
C00200 Firmware product type 24375 5F37 E 1 VISIBLE_STRING 
C00201 Firmware compile date 24374 5F36 E 1 VISIBLE_STRING 
C00203 Product type code 24372 5F34 A 9 VISIBLE_STRING 
C00222 L_PCTRL_1: Vp 24353 5F21 E 1 INTEGER_16 10  
C00223 L_PCTRL_1: Tn 24352 5F20 E 1 UNSIGNED_16 1  
C00224 L_PCTRL_1: Kd 24351 5F1F E 1 UNSIGNED_16 10  
C00225 L_PCTRL_1: MaxLimit 24350 5F1E E 1 INTEGER_16 100  
C00226 L_PCTRL_1: MinLimit 24349 5F1D E 1 INTEGER_16 100  
C00227 L_PCTRL_1: Acceleration time 24348 5F1C E 1 UNSIGNED_32 1000  
C00228 L_PCTRL_1: Deceleration time 24347 5F1B E 1 UNSIGNED_32 1000  
C00231 L_PCTRL_1: Operating range 24344 5F18 A 4 INTEGER_16 100  
C00234 Oscillation damping influence 24341 5F15 E 1 UNSIGNED_16 100  
C00242 L_PCTRL_1: Operating mode 24333 5F0D E 1 UNSIGNED_8 1  
C00243 L_PCTRL_1: Acceleration time influ- 24332 5F0C E 1 UNSIGNED_32 1000  
ence
C00244 L_PCTRL_1: Deceleration time influ- 24331 5F0B E 1 UNSIGNED_32 1000  
ence
C00245 L_PCTRL_1: PID output value 24330 5F0A E 1 INTEGER_16 100 
C00443 DIx: Level 24132 5E44 A 2 UNSIGNED_16 
C00444 DOx: Level 24131 5E43 A 2 UNSIGNED_16 
C00470 LS_ParFree_b 24105 5E29 A 16 UNSIGNED_8 1  
C00472 LS_ParFree_a 24103 5E27 A 4 INTEGER_16 100  
C00480 LS_DisFree_b 24095 5E1F E 1 UNSIGNED_8 
C00481 LS_DisFree 24094 5E1E A 4 UNSIGNED_16 
C00482 LS_DisFree_a 24093 5E1D A 4 INTEGER_16 100 
C00516 Checksums 24059 5DFB A 1 UNSIGNED_32 1 
C00517 User menu 24058 5DFA A 20 INTEGER_32 1  
C00565 Resp. to mains phase failure 24010 5DCA E 1 UNSIGNED_8 1  
C00574 Resp. to brake resist. overtemp. 24001 5DC1 E 1 UNSIGNED_8 1  
C00581 Resp. to LS_SetError_x 23994 5DBA A 2 UNSIGNED_8 1  
C00598 Resp. to open circuit AINx 23977 5DA9 A 1 UNSIGNED_8 1  
C00600 Resp. to DC bus undervoltage 23975 5DA7 A 1 UNSIGNED_8 1  
C00601 Del. resp.to fault: DC bus overvoltage 23974 5DA6 A 1 UNSIGNED_16 1000  
C00604 Resp. to device overload (Ixt) 23971 5DA3 E 1 UNSIGNED_8 1  
C00606 Resp. to motor overload (I²xt) 23969 5DA1 E 1 UNSIGNED_8 1  
C00620 16-bit system connection 23955 5D93 A 12 UNSIGNED_16 1  
C00621 Bool system connection 23954 5D92 A 23 UNSIGNED_16 1  
C00700 LA_NCtrl: Analog connection list 23875 5D43 A 9 UNSIGNED_16 1  
C00701 LA_NCtrl: Digital connection list 23874 5D42 A 18 UNSIGNED_16 1  
C00725 Current switching frequency 23850 5D2A E 1 UNSIGNED_8 1 
C00727 LS_Keypad: Digital values 23848 5D28 A 5 UNSIGNED_8 1  
C00728 LS_Keypad: Keypad analog values 23847 5D27 A 3 INTEGER_16 100  
C00800 L_MPot_1: Upper limit 23775 5CDF E 1 INTEGER_16 100  
________________________________________________________________

C00801 L_MPot_1: Lower limit 23774 5CDE E 1 INTEGER_16 100  
C00802 L_MPot_1: Acceleration time 23773 5CDD E 1 UNSIGNED_16 10  
C00803 L_MPot_1: Deceleration time 23772 5CDC E 1 UNSIGNED_16 10  
C00804 L_MPot_1: Inactive function 23771 5CDB E 1 UNSIGNED_8 1  
C00805 L_MPot_1: Init function 23770 5CDA E 1 UNSIGNED_8 1  
C00806 L_MPot_1: Use 23769 5CD9 E 1 UNSIGNED_8 1  
C00830 16-bit analog input 23745 5CC1 A 11 INTEGER_16 100 
C00831 16-bit common input 23744 5CC0 A 1 UNSIGNED_16 
C00833 8-bit input 23742 5CBE A 24 UNSIGNED_8 1 
C00909 Speed limitation 23666 5C72 A 2 INTEGER_16 100  
C00910 Frequency limitation 23665 5C71 A 2 UNSIGNED_16 1  
C00990 Flying restart fct.: Activation 23585 5C21 E 1 UNSIGNED_8 1  
C00991 Flying restart fct.: Process 23584 5C20 E 1 UNSIGNED_16 1  
C00992 Flying restart: Start frequency 23583 5C1F E 1 INTEGER_16 1  
C00994 Flying restart fct.: Current 23581 5C1D E 1 INTEGER_16 100  
10 Function library
________________________________________________________________
10 Function library
This chapter describes the function and system blocks that are part of the drive application.
Function block Function

L_MPot_1 Motor potentiometer (as alternative setpoint source)
L_NSet_1 Setpoint generator
L_PCTRL_1 Process controller
L_RLQ_1 Fail-safe linking of a selected direction of rotation to the quick stop function (QSP)
System block Function

LS_AnalogInput Interface to the analog input terminals
LS_DigitalInput Interface to the digital input terminals
LS_DigitalOutput Interface to the digital output terminals
LS_DisFree Any four 16-bit signals of the application can be displayed on display codes
LS_DisFree_a Any four analog signals of the application can be displayed on display codes
LS_DisFree_b Any eight digital signals of the application can be displayed on a bit-coded display
code
LS_DriveInterface Interface for drive control (DCTRL)
Device control (DCTRL) ( 45)
LS_Keypad Keypad control
LS_ParFix Output of different constant values
LS_ParFree_a Output of 4 parameterisable analog signals
LS_ParFree_b Output of 16 parameterisable digital signals
LS_SetError_1 Parameterisable responses to user-defined events are tripped
10 Function library
10.1 L_MPot_1
________________________________________________________________
10.1 L_MPot_1
This FB replaces a hardware motor potentiometer and can be used as an alternative setpoint source
which is controlled via two inputs.
• The signal is output via a ramp function generator with linear ramps.
• The acceleration and deceleration times are set via parameters.
• Constant ramping even with speed limit values changed online.
• The motor potentiometer function can be switched on/off online via parameters or a process
signal.
/B03RWB
&
E(QDEOH &
E8S & & $FFWLPH

&
E,Q$FW &
8SSHUOLPLW
E'RZQ &
&
/RZHUOLPLW & 'HFWLPH
& 'HDFWLYDWLRQIXQFWLRQ
& ,QLWLDOL]DWLRQIXQFWLRQ Q2XWBD
Q,QBD &

Inputs

Data type
bEnable Switch over motor potentiometer function

BOOL bEnable input and C806 code are OR'd.
TRUE Motor potentiometer function is active, setpoint can be changed via
bUp and bDown.
• With switching to TRUE, the value applied to nIn_a is automati-
cally transferred to the motor potentiometer.
FALSE The value applied to nIn_a is output at nOut_a.
nln_a When bEnable = FALSE, the analog input signal nIn_ is switched to the nOut_a out-
INT put.
bUp Approaching of the upper speed limit value set in C800
BOOL
TRUE The nOut_a output signal runs to its upper limit value (nHighLimit).
• If the bDown input is simultaneously set to TRUE, the nOut_a out-
put signal is not changed.
bDown Approaching of the lower speed limit value set in C801
BOOL
TRUE The nOut_a output signal runs to its lower limit value (nLowLimit).
• If the bUp input is simultaneously set to TRUE, the nOut_a output
signal is not changed.
bInAct Deactivate motor potentiometer function
BOOL • This input has the highest priority.
• When the motor potentiometer is deactivated, the nOut_a output signal follows
the function set with code C804.
TRUE Motor potentiometer function is deactivated.
10 Function library
10.1 L_MPot_1
________________________________________________________________
Outputs
Data type
nOut_a Output signal

INT
Parameter
Parameter Possible settings Info

C800 -199.9 % 199.9 Upper limit
• Lenze setting: 100.0 %
C801 -199.9 % 199.9 Lower limit
• Lenze setting: -100.0 %
C802 0.1 s 999.9 Acceleration time
• Lenze setting: 10.0 s
C803 0.1 s 999.9 Deceleration time
C804 Inactive function
• Selection of response when deac-
tivating the motor potentiometer
via the input bInAct.
0 Keep value No further action; nOut_a retains its
(Lenze setting) value.
1 Deceleration to 0 The motor potentiometer returns to
0 % within the deceleration time Tif.
2 Deceleration to lower limit The motor potentiometer runs
within the deceleration time Tif to
the lower limit value (C801).
3 Without ramp to 0 Important for the emergency stop
function
The motor potentiometer output im-
mediately changes to 0 %
4 Without ramp to lower limit The motor potentiometer output im-
mediately changes to the lower limit
value (C801).
5 Acceleration to upper limit The motor potentiometer runs with
the acceleration time Tir to the upper
limit value (C800).
C805 Init function
• Selection of response when swit-
ching on the device.
0 Load last value The output value being output du-
(Lenze setting) ring mains power-off is saved non-
volatilely in the internal memory of
the controller. It will be reloaded du-
ring mains power-on.
1 Load lower limit The lower limit value (C801) is loaded
during mains power-on.
2 Load 0 An output value = 0 % is loaded du-
ring mains power-on.
10 Function library
10.1 L_MPot_1
________________________________________________________________

C806 Use of the motor potentiometer
0 No The motor potentiometer is not used.
(Lenze setting) • The analog value applied to the
nIn_a input is looped through wi-
thout any changes to the nOut_a
output.
1 Yes The motor potentiometer is used.
• The analog value applied at the
nIn_a input is led via the motor
potentiometer and provided at
the nOut_a output.
10.1.1 Activate & control motor potentiometer
When bInAct is set to FALSE, the motor potentiometer is activated.

• The currently active function depends on the current output signal nOut_a, the limit values set
and the control signals at bUp and bDown.
• When the nOut_a output signal is outside the limits set, the output signal runs to the next limit
with the Ti times set. This process is independent of the control signals at bUp and bDown.
• When the nOut_a output signal is inside the limits set, the output signal changes according to
the control signals at bUp and bDown.
nOut_a
nHighLimit
wTir
wTir wTif
0
t
wTir
nLowLimit
bUp
TRUE
FALSE
t
bDown
TRUE
FALSE
t
[10-1] Example: Control of the motor potentiometer
bUp bDown bInact Function

FALSE FALSE FALSE The nOut_a output signal remains unchanged.
TRUE FALSE The nOut_a output signal runs to its upper limit value (nHighLimit).
FALSE TRUE The nOut_a output signal runs to its lower limit value (nLowLimit).
TRUE TRUE The nOut_a output signal remains unchanged.
- - TRUE The motor potentiometer function is deactivated. The nOut_a out-
put signal responds according to the function selected via Function.
10 Function library
10.1 L_MPot_1
________________________________________________________________
10.1.2 Deactivate motor potentiometer
When the motor potentiometer is deactivated by setting bInAct to TRUE, the nOut_a output signal
responds according to the function selected in C804.
nOut_a
nHighLimit
wTif
0 1 wTir
wTif
nLowLimit
wTif wTir
0
t
bUp
TRUE
FALSE
t
bDown
TRUE
FALSE
t
bInAct
TRUE
FALSE
t
 When the motor potentiometer is deactivated, nOut_a is reduced to 0 % with the deceleration time wTif.
 If it is activated again, nOut_a is increased again to nLowLimit with the acceleration time wTir.
[10-2] Example: Deactivation of the motor potentiometer if C804 = "1: Deceleration to 0"
10 Function library
10.2 L_NSet_1
________________________________________________________________
10.2 L_NSet_1
This FB is used for general signal processing of process values and is provided with the following
functions:
• Ramp function generator
• With linear ramps for main setpoint path
• With S-shaped ramp (PT1 rounding)
• Internal limitation of the input signal
• 3 fixed setpoints (JOG setpoints)
/B16HWB
E5IJ &
E16HW,QY &
Q16HWBD &
r

Q12XWBD
&

& &

&
& &
& &
E-RJ &

E-RJ &

Inputs

Data type
bRfg0 Leading the main setpoint integrator to 0 within the current Ti times
BOOL
TRUE The current value of the main setpoint integrator is led to "0" within
the Ti time set.
bNSetInv Signal inversion for the main setpoint
BOOL
TRUE Main setpoint signal is inverted.
nNset_a Main setpoint signal
INT • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 %
• Other signals are also permitted
bJog1 / bJog2 Selection inputs for fixed changeover setpoints (JOG setpoints) for the main setpoint
BOOL • Selection inputs are binary coded.
Outputs
Data type
nNOut_a Speed setpoint output signal

INT • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 %
10 Function library
10.2 L_NSet_1
________________________________________________________________
Parameter

C012 0.0 s 999.9 Acceleration time Tir for the main set-
point
C013 0.000 s 999.9 Deceleration time Tif for the main
setpoint
C039/1 -199.9 % 199.9 Fixed setpoint 1 (JOG setpoint 1)
C134 Activates ramp rounding with PT1
behaviour for the main setpoint
0 Off
• The corresponding S-ramp time
1 PT1 behaviour must be set in C182.
• Lenze setting: 0 (deactivated)
C182 0.01 s 50.00 S-ramp time PT1
10.2.1 Main setpoint path
• The signals in the main setpoint path are limited to a value range of ±32767.
• The signal at nNSet_a is first led via the JOG selection function.
• A selected JOG value switches the nNSet_a input inactive. Then, the subsequent signal conditio-
ning operates with the JOG value.
10.2.2 JOG setpoints
In addition to the direct main setpoint selection, via the input nNSet_a JOG setpoints can be set un-
der C039/1...3.
• The JOG setpoints are binary-coded and can be called using the bJog1 and bJog8 selection in-
puts:
Selection inputs Used main setpoint

bJog2 bJog1
FALSE FALSE nNSet_a
FALSE TRUE C039/1
TRUE FALSE C039/2
TRUE TRUE C039/3
• The number of selection inputs to be assigned depends on the number of JOG setpoints re-
quired.
10 Function library
10.2 L_NSet_1
________________________________________________________________
10.2.3 Setpoint inversion
The output signal of the JOG function is led via an inverter.

The sign of the setpoint changes if bNSetInv is set to TRUE.
10.2.4 Ramp function generator for the main setpoint
The setpoint is now led via a ramp function generator with linear characteristic. The ramp function
generator converts setpoint step-changes at the input into a ramp.
RFG-OUT
100 %
w2
w1 t ir t ir
0%
t
Tir Tir
w1, w2 = change of the main setpoint as a function of tir and tif

RFG-OUT = output of the ramp function generator
[10-3] Acceleration and deceleration times
• tir and tif are the desired times for changing between w1 and w2.
• The ramps for acceleration and deceleration can be set individually.
• C012: Acceleration time Tir
• C013: Deceleration time Tif
• The tir/tif values are converted into the required Ti times according to the following formula:
100 % 100 %
T ir = t ir ⋅ ----------------------- T if = t if ⋅ -----------------------
w2 – w1 w2 – w1
• When the bRfg0 output is set to TRUE, the ramp function generator brakes to 0 along its dece-
leration ramp.
10.2.5 S-shaped ramp
A PT1 element is connected downstream of the linear ramp function generator. This arrangement
implements an S-shaped ramp for a nearly jerk-free acceleration and deceleration.
• The PT1 element can be switched on/off via C134.
• The corresponding S-ramp time can be set under C182.
10 Function library
10.3 L_PCTRL_1
________________________________________________________________
10.3 L_PCTRL_1
This FB is a PID controller and can be used for various control tasks (e.g. as dancer position controller,
tension controller, or pressure controller).
The FB is provides with the following functions:
• Adjustable control algorithm (P, PI, PID)
• Ramp function generator for preventing setpoint step-changes at the input
• Limitation of the controller output
• Factorisation of the output signal
• Vp adaptation
• Integral action component can be switched off
/B3&75/B
Q$GDSWBD &
Q16HWBD & _
_ 9S &
7Q & &
& & &
.G &
_ Q2XWBD
Q6HWBD &
__
_
&
& &
E$FW(T6HW
Q$FWBD &

E,2II & Q3,'2XWBD

&
&
Q,QIOXBD &
E(QDEOH,QIOXHQFH5DPS
& &
Inputs

Data type
nAdapt_a Adaptation of gain Vp set in C222 in percent

INT • Internal limitation to ± 199.9 %
• Changes can be done online.
• Display parameter: C830/7
nNSet_a Speed setpoint
INT • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 %
• Internal limitation to ± 199.9 %
nSet_a Sensor and process setpoint for operating modes 2, 4 and 5
INT • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 %
nAct_a Speed or actual sensor value (actual process value)
INT • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 %
10 Function library
10.3 L_PCTRL_1
________________________________________________________________

Data type
bIOff Switch off I-component of the process controller

BOOL • Changes can be done online.
TRUE I-component of the process controller is switched off.
nInflu_a Limitation of the influencing factor in percent
INT • nInflu_a serves to limit the influencing factor of the PID controller contained in
the FB to a required value (- 199.9 % ... + 199.9 %).
• Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 %
bEnableInfluenceRamp Activate ramp for influencing factor
BOOL • Display parameter: C833/13
TRUE Influencing factor of the PID controller is ramped up to the nInflu_a
value.
FALSE Influencing factor of the PID controller is ramped down to "0".
Outputs
Data type
nOut_a Output signal

INT • Internal limitation to ±32767 (±199.9 %)
• Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 %
bActEqSet Status output "Setpoint and actual value are identical"
INT
TRUE Setpoint and actual value are identical, i.e. no system deviation avai-
lable.
nPIDOut_a PID controller output with influencing factor nInflu_a
INT • There is no connection with the additive input nNSet_a.
• Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 %
• Display parameter: C245
Parameter

C222 0.1 500.0 Gain Vp
• Lenze setting: 1.0
C223 20 ms 6000 Reset time Tn
• Lenze setting: 400 ms
C224 0.0 5.0 Differential component Kd
• Lenze setting: 0.0
C225 -199.9 % +199.9 Maximum value of the PID operating
range
C226 -199.9 % +199.9 Minimum value of the PID operating
range
• Lenze setting: -199.9 %
C227 0.0 s 999.9 Acceleration time for the ramp at the
PID output (should be set as steep as
possible)
C228 0.0 s 999.9 Deceleration time for the ramp at the
PID output
10 Function library
10.3 L_PCTRL_1
________________________________________________________________

C231/1 (Pos. Maximum) 0.0 % 199.9 Operating range
C231/2 (Pos. Minimum) • Determination of the operating
C231/3 (Neg. Minimum) range for the PID process control-
C231/4 (Neg. Maximum) ler by limiting the input signal
nSet_a.
• Lenze setting: No limitation (-
199.9 % ... +199.9 %)
C242 Operating mode
0 Off The input setpoint nNSet_a is output
(Lenze setting) without any changes at the output
nOut_a.
1 Additive + feedforward control nNSet_a and nAct_a are used as PID
input values. The arriving nNSet_a is
additively linked to the value output
by the PID element.
2 PID as setpoint generator. nSet_a and nAct_a are used as PID in-
put values. The input nNSet_a is not
considered.
3 PID setpoint from L_NSet_1 nNSet_a and nAct_a are used as PID
input values. The input nSet_a is not
considered.
C243 0.0 s 999.9 Influence acceleration time
• Acceleration time Tir for the influ-
encing factor.
C244 0.0 s 999.9 Influence deceleration time
• Deceleration time Tif for the influ-
encing factor.
C245 -199.9 % +199.9 Display of PID output value
nPIDOut_a
10 Function library
10.3 L_PCTRL_1
________________________________________________________________
10.3.1 Control characteristic
The PI algorithm is active in the Lenze setting.
Gain (P component)
The input value is controlled by a linear characteristic. The slope of the characteristic is determined
by the controller gain Vp.
The controller gain Vp is set under C222.
• The controller gain can be adapted via the input nAdapt_a (also possible in online mode).
• The input value nAdapt_a has a direct effect on the controller gain:
P = nAdapt_a ⋅ C00222
Example: With the parameterised controller gain Vp = 2.0 and nAdapt_a = 75 %, the resulting gain
factor is as follows:
75 [%]
P = ------------------- ⋅ 2.0 = 1.5
100 [%]
Integral action component (I component)

The I component of the controller can be deactivated by setting the input bIOff to TRUE.
• Setting the reset time Tn to the maximum value of "6000 ms" also deactivates the I component.
• The I component can be switched on and off online.
Adjustment time
The reset time Tn is set under C223.
Differential component Kd (D component)

The differential component Kd is set under C224.
• The setting "0.0" deactivates the D component (Lenze setting). In this way, the PID controller be-
comes a PI controller or P controller, if the I component has been deactivated as well.
10 Function library
10.3 L_PCTRL_1
________________________________________________________________
10.3.2 Ramp function generator
The PID output is led via a ramp function generator with linear characteristic. This serves to transfer
setpoint step-changes at the PID output into a ramp which should be as steep as possible.
RFG-OUT
100 %
w2
w1 t ir t ir
0%
t
Tir Tir
w1, w2 = change of the main setpoint as a function of tir and tif

RFG-OUT = output of the ramp function generator
[10-4] Acceleration and deceleration times
• tir and tif are the desired times for changing between w1 and w2.
• The ramps for acceleration and deceleration can be set individually.
• C227: Acceleration time Tir
• C228: Deceleration time Tif
• The tir/tif values are converted into the required Ti times according to the following formula:
100 % 100 %
T ir = t ir ⋅ ----------------------- T if = t if ⋅ -----------------------
w2 – w1 w2 – w1
• The ramp function generator is immediately set to "0" by setting bInAct to TRUE.
10.3.3 Operating range of the PID process controller
The value range of the input signal nSet_a and thus the operating range of the PID process controller
can be limited with the following parameters:
• C231/1: Pos. maximum (default setting: 199.9 %)
• C231/2: Pos. minimum (default setting: 0.0 %)
• C231/3: Neg. minimum (default setting: 0.0 %)
• C231/4: Neg. maximum (default setting: 199.9 %)
10.3.4 Evaluation of the output signal
After the limitation, the output signal is evaluated with the influencing factor nInflu_a. The evalu-
ation is activated/suppressed along a ramp when the input bEnableInfluenceRamp is set to TRUE.
The ramp times are set with the parameters "Acceleration time influence" (C243) and "Deceleration
time influence" (C244).
10 Function library
10.4 L_RLQ_1
________________________________________________________________
10.4 L_RLQ_1
This FB links a selected direction of rotation to the quick stop function with wire-break protection.
/B5/4B
,QLW
,QLW
E&Z
E&FZ
6 E&Z&FZ
)$/6(
5

E4VS
758(
Inputs

Data type
bCw Input
BOOL • TRUE = CW rotation
bCCw Input
BOOL • TRUE = CCW rotation
Outputs
Data type
bQSP Output signal for quick stop (QSP)

BOOL
bCwCcw Output signal for CW/CCW rotation

BOOL • TRUE = CCW rotation
Function
Inputs Outputs Notes

bCw bCCw bCwCcw bQSP
TRUE TRUE FALSE TRUE The inputs have this state only if a TRUE signal is being applied to
both inputs at the moment of switch-on!
See also FB illustration above, "Init" = 1.
If one of the inputs has the TRUE state, the following truth table applies:
FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE See also FB illustration above, "Init" = 0.
TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE
FALSE TRUE TRUE FALSE
TRUE TRUE X (save)
[10-5] Truth table of the FB L_RLQ, 0 = FALSE, 1 = TRUE
10 Function library
10.4 L_RLQ_1
________________________________________________________________
Wiring in the application
E6HW6SHHG&FZ
/B16HWBE16HW,QY
E&Z E&Z&FZ
E&FZ 5/4 E4VS
E6HW4XLFNVWRS 0&75/E4VS2Q
[10-6] Internal wiring
10 Function library
10.5 LS_AnalogInput
________________________________________________________________
10.5 LS_AnalogInput
The LS_AnalogInput system block displays the analog input in the application on I/O level.
/6B$QDORJ,QSXW
2IIVHW *DLQ 0LQLPXPDQDORJVHWSRLQW
& & & &
& $
& & $,QB2XW
$8

'
$,QBE&XUUHQW(UURU,Q
& (UURUUHDFWLRQ
Outputs
Data type
nIn1_a Analog input 1

C033/1 | INT • Scaling:
±214 ≡ ±10 V for use as voltage input
+214 ≡ +20 mA for use as current input
bCurrentErrorIn1 Status signal "Current input error"
BOOL • Only when analog input 1 is used as current input.
• Application: Cable-breakage monitoring of the 4 ...20 mA circuit.
TRUE |IAIN1| < 4 mA
Related topics:
Electrical data ( 120)
10 Function library
10.6 LS_DigitalInput
________________________________________________________________
10.6 LS_DigitalInput
The LS_DigitalInput system block displays the digital input terminals in the application on I/O level.
/6B'LJLWDO,QSXW
&%LW E&,QK
&%LW &%LW E,Q
', &
&%LW &%LW E,Q
',
&%LW &%LW E,Q
',
&%LW &%LW E,Q
',
Outputs
bCInh RFR digital input (controller enable)

C443/2 | BOOL
bIn1 ... bIn4 Digital input DI1 ... DI4

C443/2 | BOOL
Related topics:
10 Function library
10.7 LS_DigitalOutput
________________________________________________________________
10.7 LS_DigitalOutput
The LS_DigitalInput system block displays the digital output terminals in the application on I/O le-
vel.
/6B'LJLWDO2XWSXW
&%LW &%LW
&RQILJXUDWLRQSDUDPHWHUV E5HOD\ &%LW
& &20

12
&
6ZLWFKLQJF\FOHV
&%LW

E2XW &%LW &%LW
& '2

Inputs

bRelay Relay output (potential-free two-way switch)

C444/1 | BOOL
bOut1 Digital output DO1

C444/1 | BOOL
Related topics:
10 Function library
10.8 LS_DisFree
________________________________________________________________
10.8 LS_DisFree
This system block displays any four 16-bit signals of the application on display codes. The signals to
be displayed are selected via the given configuration parameters.
/6B'LV)UHH
&RQILJXUDWLRQSDUDPHWHUV Z'LV
& &
Z'LV
& &
Z'LV
& &
Z'LV
& &
Inputs

Data type
wDis1 ... wDis4 Inputs for any 16-bit signals of the application
WORD
Parameter

C481/1...4 0x0000 0xFFFF Display of the 16-bit signals at the
wDis1 ... wDis4 inputs
C620/5...8 See selection list - analog signals Configuration parameters for the in-
puts wDis1 ... wDis4
10 Function library
10.9 LS_DisFree_a
________________________________________________________________
10.9 LS_DisFree_a
This system block displays any four analog signals of the application on display codes. The signals
to be displayed are selected via the given configuration parameters.
/6B'LV)UHHBD
&RQILJXUDWLRQSDUDPHWHUV Q'LVBD
& &
Q'LVBD
& &
Q'LVBD
& &
Q'LVBD
& &
Inputs

Data type
nDis1_a ... nDis4_a Inputs for any analog signal of the application
INT
Parameter

C482/1...4 -199.9 % 199.9 % Display of the analog signals which
are applied at the nDis1_a ... nDis4_a
inputs.
C620/9...12 See selection list - analog signals Configuration parameters for the in-
puts nDis1_a ... nDis4_a
10 Function library
10.10 LS_DisFree_b
________________________________________________________________
10.10 LS_DisFree_b
This system block displays any eight digital signals of the application on a bit-coded display code.
The signals to be displayed are selected via the given configuration parameters.
/6B'LV)UHHBE
&RQILJXUDWLRQSDUDPHWHUV E'LV
& %LW
E'LV
& %LW
E'LV
& %LW
E'LV
& %LW
&
E'LV
& %LW
E'LV
& %LW
E'LV
& %LW
E'LV
& %LW
Inputs

Data type
bDis1 ... bDis8 Inputs for any digital signal of the application
BOOL
Parameter

C480 0x0000 0xFFFF Display of the digital signals applied
at the bDis1 ... bDis8 inputs in the
Bit 0 Signal level at the bDis1 input
form of hexadecimal values
... ...
C621/16...23 See selection list - digital signals Configuration parameters for the in-
puts bDis1 ... bDis8
10 Function library
10.11 LS_DriveInterface
________________________________________________________________
The LS_DriveInterface system block displays the device control in the application.
/6B'ULYH,QWHUIDFH
Z6WDWH'HWHUP)DLO1R/RZ
Z6WDWH'HWHUP)DLO1R+LJK
&
48,&.6723 E,QLW
E6DIH7RUTXH2II
&
E&,QK E5HDG\
(1$%/(',6$%/(

5)5 E5HDG\7R6ZLWFK2Q

E2SHUDWLRQ(QDEOH
& E:DUQLQJ
E)DLO5HVHW
5(6(7)$,/
E)DLO
E6DIHW\,V$FWLYH
E,PS,V$FWLYH

E&,QK,V$FWLYH
E&Z&FZ
6SHHG & "

E1DFW&RPSDUH
Z'HYLFH6WDWH:RUG
%LW )UHH6WDWXV%LW
E6WDWXVB%LW &
%LW 3RZHU'LVDEOHG
E6WDWXVB%LW
%LW )UHH6WDWXV%LW
E6WDWXVB%LW
%LW )UHH6WDWXV%LW
E6WDWXVB%LW
%LW )UHH6WDWXV%LW
E6WDWXVB%LW
67$786:25'
%LW )UHH6WDWXV%LW
E6WDWXVB%LW
%LW $FW6SHHG,V=HUR
E6WDWXVB%LW
%LW &RQWUROOHU,QKLELW
%LW 6WDWXV&RGH%LW
%LW 6WDWXV&RGH%LW
%LW 6WDWXV&RGH%LW
%LW 6WDWXV&RGH%LW
%LW :DUQLQJ
%LW 7URXEOH
%LW )UHH6WDWXV%LW
%LW )UHH6WDWXV%LW
10 Function library
________________________________________________________________
Inputs

bCInh Enable/Inhibit controller

C833/14 | BOOL
FALSE Enable controller: The controller switches to the "OperationEnabled"
device state, if no other source of a controller inhibit is active.
• C158 provides a bit coded representation of all active sour-
ces/triggers of a controller inhibit.
TRUE Inhibit controller (controller inhibit): The controller switches to the
"SwitchedON" device state.
bFailReset Reset of error message
C833/15 | BOOL In the Lenze setting this input is connected to the digital input controller enable so
that a possibly existing error message is reset together with the controller enable (if
the cause for the fault is eliminated).
TRUE The current fault is reset, if the cause for the fault is eliminated.
• If the fault still exists, the error status remains unchanged.
bStatus_Bit0 Freely assignable bits in the status word of the controller.
bStatus_Bit2 Pre-assignment in the Lenze setting:
bStatus_Bit3 Bit0 - (Not connected)
bStatus_Bit4
bStatus_Bit5 Bit2 Current setpoint in the limitation
bStatus_Bit14 Bit3 Speed setpoint reached
bStatus_Bit15
C833/16 ... 22 | BOOL
Bit4 Actual speed value has reached the setpoint within one hysteresis
band
Bit5 Speed setpoint < comparison value (C024)
Bit14 Current direction of rotation:
0 ≡ Clockwise rotation (Cw)
1 ≡ Counter-clockwise rotation (Ccw)
Bit15 Drive is ready for operation
10 Function library
________________________________________________________________
Outputs
wDeviceStateWord Status word of the controller (based on DSP-402)

C150 | WORD • The status word contains information on the currents status of the drive control-
ler.
wStateDetermFailNoLow Display of the status determining error (LOW word)
WORD
wStateDetermFailNoHigh Display of the status determining error (HIGH word)

WORD
bInit TRUE "Init" device state is active

BOOL
bSafeTorqueOff TRUE "SafeTorqueOff" device state is active

BOOL
bReady TRUE "SwitchedON" device state is active

BOOL
bReadyToSwitchOn TRUE "ReadyToSwitchON" device state is active

BOOL
bOperationEnable TRUE "OperationEnabled" device state is active

BOOL
bWarning TRUE A warning exists

BOOL
bFail TRUE "Fault" device state is active

BOOL
bSafetyIsActive TRUE In preparation

BOOL
bImpIsActive TRUE Pulse inhibit is active

BOOL
bCInhIsActive TRUE Controller inhibit is active

BOOL
bCwCcw FALSE Clockwise rotation (Cw)

BOOL
bNactCompare TRUE During open-loop operation:
BOOL Speed setpoint < comparison value (C024)
During closed-loop operation:
Actual speed value < comparison value (C024)
10 Function library
10.12 LS_Keypad
________________________________________________________________
10.12 LS_Keypad
This system block is used on I/O interconnection level if the "Keypad" control mode has been selec-
ted in C007.
In the "Keypad" control mode, the LS_Keypad system block passes on various setpoints and control
commands to the technology application which can be selected/activated via codes using the key-
pad.
/6B.H\SDG
E6HW4XLFNVWRS
&
E6HW'&%UDNH
&
E6HW6SHHG&FZ
&
E-RJ6SHHG
&
E-RJ6SHHG
&
Q7RUTXH0RW/LPLWBD
&
Q7RUTXH*HQ/LPLWBD
&
Q0DLQ6HW9DOXHBD
&
Outputs
Data type
bSetQuickstop C727/1 = "1" ≡ Request quick stop

BOOL
bSetDCBrake C727/2 = "1" ≡ Request DC-injection braking

BOOL
bSetSpeedCcw C727/3 = "1" ≡ Request reversal"

BOOL
bJogSpeed1 C727/4 = "1" ≡ Request fixed speed setpoint 1/2

BOOL
bJogSpeed2 C727/5 = "1" ≡ Request fixed speed setpoint 2/3

BOOL
nTorqueMotLimit_a Torque limit in motor mode set in C728/1

INT • Lenze setting: 100.0 %
nTorqueGenLimit_a Torque limit in generator mode set in C728/2
nMainSetValue_a Setpoint speed set in C728/3
Parameter

C727/1...8 0 1 Keypad digital values
• Executing control commands
when operating via keypad
• See the "Outputs" table for the
meaning of the individual sub-
codes
C728/1...3 -199.9 % 199.9 Keypad analog values
• Selection of different setpoints
when operating via keypad
• See the "Outputs" table for the
meaning of the individual sub-
codes
10 Function library
10.13 LS_ParFix
________________________________________________________________
10.13 LS_ParFix
This system block outputs various fixed values (constants) to be used in the interconnection. The
constants can be assigned to other inputs via configuration parameters.
/6B3DU)L[
&BE7UXH
758(
&BQ3RVBD

&BQ1HJBD

&BQ3RVBBD

&BQ1HJBBD

&BZ
[))))
&BZ'ULYH&WUO
[
6ZLWFK2Q 758(
(QDEOH2SHUDWLRQ 758(
Outputs
Data type
C_bTrue 1 ≡ TRUE
BOOL
C_nPos100_a 16384 ≡ + 100 %

INT
C_nNeg100_a -16384 ≡ - 100 %

INT
C_nPos199_9_a 32767 ≡ + 199.9 %

INT
C_nNeg199_9_a -32767 ≡ - 199.9 %

INT
C_w65535 65535 ≡ 0xFFFF

WORD
C_wDriveCtrl 9 ≡ 0x0009
WORD • Bit 0, SwitchOn = TRUE
• Bit 3, EnableOperation = TRUE
• All others: FALSE
Related topics:
10 Function library
10.14 LS_ParFree_a
________________________________________________________________
10.14 LS_ParFree_a
This system block outputs 4 parameterisable analog signals. The analog signals can be assigned to
other inputs via configuration parameters.
/6B3DU)UHHBD
Q3DUBD
&
Q3DUBD
&
Q3DUBD
&
Q3DUBD
&
Outputs
Data type
nPar1_a ... nPar4_a Output of the analog signals parameterised in C472/1...4

INT
Parameter

C472/1...4 -199.9 % +199.9 Selection of analog signals to be out-
put
Related topics:
10 Function library
10.15 LS_ParFree_b
________________________________________________________________
10.15 LS_ParFree_b
This system block outputs 16 parameterisable digital signals. The digital signals can be assigned to
other inputs via configuration parameters.
/6B3DU)UHHBE
E3DU
&
E3DU
&
E3DU
&
E3DU
&
E3DU
&
Outputs
Data type
bPar1 ... bPar16 Output of the signals levels (FALSE/TRUE) parameterised in C470/1...16
BOOL
Parameter

C470/1...16 Selection of signal levels to be output
0 "FALSE" signal is output • Bit 0 ... 15 = bPar1 ... bPar16
1 "TRUE" signal is output
Related topics:
10 Function library
10.16 LS_SetError_1
________________________________________________________________
10.16 LS_SetError_1
This system block is used for error handling within the application.
• The application can trip up to two different user error messages with parameterisable error re-
sponse via the two boolean inputs.
• If both inputs are set to TRUE at the same time, the bSetError1 inputs trips the error message.
/6B6HW(UURUB

E6HW(UURU
& 5HDFWLRQ

E6HW(UURU
& 5HDFWLRQ

Inputs

Data type
bSetError1 Input for tripping "US01: User error 1"

BOOL • Error subject number: 980
• Error number: (C581/1 x 0x0400000) + (980 x 0x10000)
bSetError2 Input for tripping "US02: User error 2"
BOOL • Error subject number: 981
• Error number: (C581/2 x 0x0400000) + (981 x 0x10000)
Parameter

C581/1...2 Response for user error 1 ... 2
0 No response • lenze setting: "Fault"
1 Fault (pulse inhibit)

2 Trouble
4 WarningLocked
Index
________________________________________________________________
Numbers C137 190

16-bit analog input (C00830) 215 C141 190
16-bit common input (C00831) 215 C142 191
16-bit system connection (C00620) 209 C144 191
87-Hz operation 84 C15 175
8-bit input (C00833) 216 C150 192
C155 193
A C158 194
Acceleration time main setpoint (C00012) 175 C159 195
AINx C16 176
Configuration (C00034) 179 C165 195
Gain (C00027) 178 C166 195
Input current (C00029) 178 C167 196
Input voltage (C00028) 178 C168 196
Offset (C00026) 178 C169 196
Output value (C00033) 179
C170 196
An01
C171 196
AIN1_I < 4 mA (error message) 159
C173 197
Analog inputs 112
C174 197
Appl.
C177 197
Reference frequency C11 (C00059) 182
C178 197
Reference speed (C00011) 175
C179 197
Application notes 12
C18 176
Auto-DCB 98
Hold time (C00106) 187 C182 198, 231
Threshold (C00019) 176 C19 176
Automatic DC-injection braking (Auto-DCB) 98 C2 171
Automatic motor data identification 71 C200 198
Automatic saving 50 C201 198
Auto-start option (C00142) 191 C203 198
C21 177
B C22 177
Blocks 225 C222 198, 234
Bool system connection (C00621) 210 C223 199, 234
Brake chopper 102 C224 199, 234
Brake resistor 102 C225 199, 234
Brake resistor monitoring (I2xt) 107 C226 199, 234
Braking operation 102 C227 199, 234
C228 200, 234
C C23 177
C10 174 C231 200, 235
C100 186 C234 200
C105 187 C235 200
C106 187 C236 200
C107 187 C24 177
C11 175 C242 201, 235
C114 188 C243 201, 235
C118 188 C244 201, 235
C12 175, 231 C245 201, 235
C120 189 C26 178
C122 189 C27 178
C123 189 C28 178
C13 175, 231 C29 178
C134 189, 231 C3 173
Index
________________________________________________________________
C308 202 C805 214

C309 202 C806 215, 228
C33 179 C81 183
C34 179 C830 215
C36 179 C831 215
C39 180, 231 C833 216
C443 202 C84 183
C444 203 C85 183
C462 203 C87 184
C470 203, 252 C88 184
C472 204, 251 C89 184
C480 204, 245 C90 184
C481 204, 243 C909 216
C482 205, 244 C91 185
C50 180 C910 217
C51 180 C92 185
C516 205 C93 185
C517 206 C94 185
C52 180 C95 185
C53 181 C97 186
C54 181 C98 186
C56 181 C99 186
C565 206 C990 217
C57 181 C991 217
C574 207 C992 217
C58 181 C994 218
C581 207 Cause for controller inhibit (C00158) 194
C59 182 Cause for quick stop QSP (C00159) 195
C598 207 Checksums (C00516) 205
C6 173 Comparison value N_Act (C00024) 177
C600 208 Control mode 74
C601 208 Control mode (C00007) 174
C604 208 Conventions used 9
C606 208 Current switching frequency (C00725) 212
C61 182
C620 209 D
C621 210 Data type 166
C64 182 DCB
C66 182 Current (C00036) 179
C7 174 Hold time (C00107) 187
C700 211 DCB (DC-injection braking) 98
C701 212 DC-bus voltage (C00053) 181
C725 212 DC-injection braking 97
C727 213, 249 Deceleration time main setpoint (C00013) 175
C728 213, 249 Deceleration time quick stop (C00105) 187
C729 213 Defining current limits 77
C73 183 Defining speed limits 77
C74 183 Delayed resp. to fault
C800 213, 227 DC bus overvoltage (C00601) 208
C801 213, 227 Device commands (C00002) 171
C802 214, 227 Device overload monitoring (Ixt) 104
C803 214, 227 Device rated current (C00098) 186
C804 214, 227, 229 Device settings (C00141) 190
Device state (C00137) 190
Index
________________________________________________________________
Device utilisation (Ixt) (C00064) 182 xx.0123.00057 159

Device utilisation threshold (Ixt) (C00123) 189 xx.0123.00065 159
dF01 xx.0123.00105 159
Internal error 01 (error message) 161 xx.0125.00001 159
dF02 xx.0144.00001 160
dF03 xx.0144.00003 160
xx.0144.00031 160
dF04
xx.0145.00001 161
Internal error 04 (error message) 161
xx.0145.00002 161
dF05
xx.0145.00003 161
xx.0145.00004 161
dF06
xx.0145.00005 161
xx.0145.00006 162
dF07 xx.0145.00007 162
dF08 xx.0145.00009 162
dF09 xx.0400.00105 163
dF10 xx.0981.00000 163
Internal error 10 (error message) 162 Error number (C00168) 196
dH69 Error subject area 154
Adjustment fault (error message) 163 Error type 153
Digital input assignment 212 Exporting logbook entries 147
Digital inputs 110
Digital outputs 110 F
Digital terminals 110 Feedback to Lenze 259
DIx Firmware compile date (C00201) 198
Level (C00443) 202 Firmware product type (C00200) 198
DIx inversion (C00114) 188 Firmware version (C00099) 186
DOx Firmware version (C00100) 186
Level (C00444) 203 Fixed setpoint x (L_NSet_1 n-Fix) (C00039) 180
DOx inversion (C00118) 188 Flying restart fct. 95
Drive interface 45 Activation (C00990) 217
Current (C00994) 218
E Process (C00991) 217
Elapsed-hour meter (C00178) 197 Start frequency (C00992) 217
Electrical data I/O terminals 120 Frequency limitation (C00910) 217
E-mail to Lenze 259 Function assignment 212
Error counter (C00170) 196 Function blocks 225
Error ID 154 Function library 225
Error information (C00165) 195
Error information text (C00166) 195 H
Error messages 153 Heatsink temperature (C00061) 182
Error messages (short overview) 156
Error number 153 I
xx.0111.00002 157 ID1
xx.0119.00001 157 Motor data identification error (error message) 159
xx.0119.00050 157 Imax controller 82
xx.0119.00052 158 Imax in generator mode (C00023) 177
xx.0123.00014 158 Imax in motor mode (C00022) 177
xx.0123.00015 158 Initial value motor overload (I²xt) (C00122) 189
xx.0123.00016 158
xx.0123.00017 159
Index
________________________________________________________________
Interconnection LS_ParFree_b 252

"Terminals 0" control mode 136 LS_ParFree_b (C00470) 203
Internal wiring LS_SetError_1 253
"Terminals 0" control mode 136 LU
DC bus undervoltage (error message) 158
L
L_MPot 226 M
L_MPot_1 226 Mains phase failure monitoring 108
Acceleration time (C00802) 214 Mains voltage (C00173) 197
Deceleration time (C00803) 214 Manual DC-injection braking (DCB) 98
Inactive fct. (C00804) 214 Maximum torque (C00057) 181
Init fct. (C00805) 214
MCTRL
Lower limit (C00801) 213
Actual speed value (C00051) 180
Upper limit (C00800) 213
Speed setpoint (C00050) 180
Use (C00806) 215
Minimum analog setpoint (C00010) 174
L_NSet 230
Monitoring 104, 148
L_NSet_1 230
Motor catalogue 69
L_PCTRL 233
Motor control 65
L_PCTRL_1 233
87-Hz operation 84
Acceleration time (C00227) 199
DC-injection braking 97
Acceleration time influence (C00243) 201
Flying restart fct. 95
Deceleration time (C00228) 200
Oscillation damping 101
Deceleration time influence (C00244) 201
Selection help 76
Kd (C00224) 199
Selection of switching frequency 93
MaxLimit (C00225) 199
Selection of the control mode 74
MinLimit (C00226) 199
Sensorless vector control (SLVC) 88
Operating mode (C00242) 201
Slip compensation 100
Operating range (C00231) 200
V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) 79
PID output value (C00245) 201
Motor control (C00006) 173
Tn (C00223) 199
Motor cosine phi (C00091) 185
Vp (C00222) 198
Motor current (C00054) 181
L_RLQ 238
Motor data 66
L_RLQ_1 238
Motor load monitoring (I2xt) 105
LA_NCtrl
Analog connection list (C00700) 211 Motor magnetising current (C00095) 185
Digital connection list (C00701) 212 Motor magnetising inductance (C00092) 185
Layout of the safety instructions 12 Motor overload threshold (I²xt) (C00120) 189
LED status display 19 Motor parameter identification 71
Library 225 Motor parameter identification is active 57
LS_AnalogInput 240 Motor selection 66
LS_DigitalInput 241 Motor stator leakage inductance (C00085) 183
LS_DigitalOutput 242 Motor stator resistance (C00084) 183
LS_DisFree 243 Motor voltage (C00052) 180
LS_DisFree (C00481) 204
LS_DisFree_a 244
O
LS_DisFree_a (C00482) 205 OC1
Power section - short circuit (error message) 158
LS_DisFree_b 245
OC12
LS_DisFree_b (C00480) 204
I2xt overload - brake resistor (error message) 159
LS_DriveInterface 246
OC2
LS_Keypad 249
Power section - earth fault (error message) 159
digital values (C00727) 213
OC5
Keypad analog values (C00728) 213
Ixt overload (error message) 157
LS_ParFix 250
OC6
LS_ParFree_a 251
I2xt overload - motor (error message) 159
LS_ParFree_a (C00472) 204
Index
________________________________________________________________
OC9 Selection of the control mode 74

Ixt overload - shutdown limit (error message) 158 Sensorless vector control (SLVC) 75, 88
OH Setting the error response 150
Heatsink overtemperature (error message) 157 Short overview of error messages 156
Oscillation damping 101 Signal flow
Oscillation damping influence (C00234) 200 V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) 79
OU V/f control (VFCplus + encoder) 89
DC bus overvoltage (error message) 158 Signal source assignment 212
Output frequency (C00058) 181 Slip comp. (C00021) 177
Slip compensation 100
P Speed control with torque limitation (SLVC) 89
Password (C00094) 185 Speed limitation (C00909) 216
Password protection 24 S-ramp time PT1 (C00182) 198
PC manual control 40 Status of last device command (C00003) 173
Peak current limitation 77 Status word (C00150) 192
Plant parameters 70 Status word 2 (C00155) 193
Power section identification (C00093) 185 Su02
Power-on time meter (C00179) 197 One mains phase is missing (error message) 157
Product type code (C00203) 198 Switching cycles (C00177) 197
PS01 Switching frequency 93
No memory module (error message) 160 Switching frequency (C00018) 176
PS02 Switching frequency reduction (temp.) (C00144) 191
Par. set invalid (error message) 160 System blocks 225
PS03 System error messages 153
Par. set device invalid (error message) 160
PS04 T
Par. set device incompatible (error message) 160 Thermal motor load (I²xt) (C00066) 182
PS31 Ti Imax controller (C00074) 183
Ident. error (error message) 160
Time of error (C00169) 196
Torque (C00056) 181
R
Torque limitation 86
Ramp smoothing, main setpoint (C00134) 189
Rated motor current (C00088) 184 U
Rated motor frequency (C00089) 184
US01
Rated motor power (C00081) 183 User error 1 (error message) 163
Rated motor speed (C00087) 184 US02
Rated motor torque (C00097) 186 User error 2 (error message) 163
Rated motor voltage (C00090) 184 User menu 23
Reduced brake chopper threshold (C00174) 197 User menu (C00517) 206
Reset of error message 155
Resp. to brake resist. overtemp. (C00574) 207 V
Resp. to DC bus undervoltage (C00600) 208 V/f base frequency 84
Resp. to device overload (Ixt) (C00604) 208 V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) 75, 79
Resp. to LS_SetError_x (C00581) 207 VFC
Resp. to mains phase failure (C00565) 206 V/f base frequency (C00015) 175
Resp. to motor overload (I²xt) (C00606) 208 Vmin boost (C00016) 176
Resp. to open circuit AINx (C00598) 207 Vmin boost 85
Vp Imax controller (C00073) 183
S
Safety instructions 12
Save parameter settings 50
Saving parameters automatically 50
Selection help for motor control 76
Selection of switching frequency 93
Your opinion is important to us
)(('%$&.
These instructions were created to the best of our knowledge and
belief to give you the best possible support for handling our product.
If you have suggestions for improvement, please e-mail us to:
feedback-docu@Lenze.de
Thank you for your support.

Your Lenze documentation team
259
8400 BaseLine D · Reference manual · EDS84AVBDxx · 13292140 · DMS 5.5 EN · 01/2014 · TD05

Lenze AC Tech Corporation
630 Douglas Street
Uxbridge, MA 01569
USA
+1 508 / 278-9100
+1 508 / 278-7873
info@actechdrives.com
www.actech.com
Service
Lenze Service GmbH
Breslauer Straße 3
D-32699 Extertal
Germany
00 80 00 / 24 4 68 77 (24 h helpline)
+49 (0)51 54 / 82-11 12
Service@Lenze.de

E84avbde 8400 Baseline D v5-5 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

E84avbde 8400 Baseline D v5-5 en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

E84avbde 8400 Baseline D v5-5 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Inverter

Inverter Drives 8400 BaseLine D _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Reference manual EN

Project planning, selection & ordering Legend:

2 Lenze · 8400 BaseLine D · Reference manual · DMS 5.5 EN · 01/2014 · TD05

1 About this documentation _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 8

2 Introduction: Parameterising the controller _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 13

4 Device control (DCTRL) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 45

Lenze · 8400 BaseLine D · Reference manual · DMS 5.5 EN · 01/2014 · TD05 3

5 Motor control (MCTRL) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 65

6 I/O terminals _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 109

4 Lenze · 8400 BaseLine D · Reference manual · DMS 5.5 EN · 01/2014 · TD05

7 Drive application _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 122

8 Diagnostics & error management _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 142

Lenze · 8400 BaseLine D · Reference manual · DMS 5.5 EN · 01/2014 · TD05 5

9 Parameter reference _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 164

10 Function library _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 225

Your opinion is important to us _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 259

6 Lenze · 8400 BaseLine D · Reference manual · DMS 5.5 EN · 01/2014 · TD05

Lenze · 8400 BaseLine D · Reference manual · DMS 5.5 EN · 01/2014 · TD05 7

1 About this documentation

Type Type designation From software version Important

1.1 Document history

8 Lenze · 8400 BaseLine D · Reference manual · DMS 5.5 EN · 01/2014 · TD05

1.2 Conventions used

Type of information Writing Examples/notes

Lenze · 8400 BaseLine D · Reference manual · DMS 5.5 EN · 01/2014 · TD05 9

1.3 Terminology used

10 Lenze · 8400 BaseLine D · Reference manual · DMS 5.5 EN · 01/2014 · TD05

Lenze · 8400 BaseLine D · Reference manual · DMS 5.5 EN · 01/2014 · TD05 11

1.4 Definition of the notes used

 Pictograph and signal word!

Pictograph Signal word Meaning

Pictograph Signal word Meaning

12 Lenze · 8400 BaseLine D · Reference manual · DMS 5.5 EN · 01/2014 · TD05

2 Introduction: Parameterising the controller

[2-1] Example configuration for parameterising the controller (here: BaseLine D)

Lenze · 8400 BaseLine D · Reference manual · DMS 5.5 EN · 01/2014 · TD05 13

2.1 General notes on parameters

Parameter group Examples

14 Lenze · 8400 BaseLine D · Reference manual · DMS 5.5 EN · 01/2014 · TD05

2.2 Handling the memory module

• The memory module is plugged into the EPM slot at the

Lenze · 8400 BaseLine D · Reference manual · DMS 5.5 EN · 01/2014 · TD05 15

• The memory module (EPM) is required for operation.

Replacing the controller

16 Lenze · 8400 BaseLine D · Reference manual · DMS 5.5 EN · 01/2014 · TD05

Parameter set transfer using the »Engineer«

Symbol Menu command Shortcut

Read parameter set from device <F7>

Save parameter set

Lenze · 8400 BaseLine D · Reference manual · DMS 5.5 EN · 01/2014 · TD05 17

2.3 Internal Keypad

2.3.1 Display elements and control panel

Symbol Information Meaning

F yellow Direction of rotation: CCW rotation

18 Lenze · 8400 BaseLine D · Reference manual · DMS 5.5 EN · 01/2014 · TD05

Key Name Function

2.3.2 LED status display

Information on some operating states can quickly be ob-